Samsung LN46A850S1F User manual

Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG
customer care center.
Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
Si tiene alguna pregunta o comentario referente a nuestros productos, por favor contacte con nuestro Servicio de Atención al
Cliente.
Country
CANADA
U.S.A
Customer Care Center
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/us
Address
Samsung Electronics Canada Inc., Customer
Service 55 Standish Court Mississauga,
Ontario L5R 4B2 Canada
Samsung Electronique Canada Inc.,
Service à la Clientèle 55 Standish Court
Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4B2 Canada
Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
105 Challenger Road
Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660-0511
LCD TV
user manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/global/register
Model
Serial No.
BN68-01691A-02
BN68-01691A-Cover.indd 1
2008-08-07 �� 11:19:06
Important Warranty Information Regarding Television Format Viewing
Wide screen format LCD Displays (16:9, the aspect ratio of the screen width to height) are primarily designed to view wide screen format
full-motion video. The images displayed on them should primarily be in the wide screen 16:9 ratio format, or expanded to fill the screen if
your model offers this feature and the images are constantly moving. Displaying stationary graphics and images on screen, such as the dark
sidebars on nonexpanded standard format television video and programming, should be limited to no more than 5% of the total television
viewing per week.
Additionally, viewing other stationary images and text such as stock market reports, video game displays, station logos, web sites or computer
graphics and patterns, should be limited as described above for all televisions. Displaying stationary images that exceed the above guidelines
can cause uneven aging of LCD Displays that leave subtle, but permanent burned-in ghost images in the LCD picture. To avoid this, vary the
programming and images, and primarily display full screen moving images, not stationary patterns or dark bars.
On LCD models that offer picture sizing features, use these controls to view different formats as a full screen picture.
Be careful in the selection and duration of television formats used for viewing. Uneven LCD aging as a result of format selection and use, as
well as burned-in images, are not covered by your Samsung limited warranty.
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICAN LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
Subject to the requirements, conditions, exclusions and limitations of the original Limited Warranty supplied with Samsung Electronics
(SAMSUNG) products, and the requirements, conditions, exclusions and limitations contained herein, SAMSUNG will additionally provide
Warranty Repair Service in the United States on SAMSUNG products purchased in Canada, and in Canada on SAMSUNG products
purchased in the United States, for the warranty period originally specified, and to the Original Purchaser only.
The above described warranty repairs must be performed by a SAMSUNG Authorized Service Center. Along with this Statement, the
Original Limited Warranty Statement and a dated Bill of Sale as Proof of Purchase must be presented to the Service Center. Transportation
to and from the Service Center is the responsibility of the purchaser.
Conditions covered are limited only to manufacturing defects in material or workmanship, and only those encountered in normal use of the
product.
Excluded, but not limited to, are any originally specified provisions for, in-home or on-site services, minimum or maximum repair times,
exchanges or replacements, accessories, options, upgrades, or consumables.
For the location of a SAMSUNG Authorized Service Center, please call toll-free:
In the United States : 1-800-SAMSUNG (1-800-726-7864) In Canada : 1-800-SAMSUNG
➣ See the warranty card for more information on warranty terms.
Precautions When Displaying a Still Image
A still image may cause permanent damage to the TV screen
• Do not display a still image on the LCD panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention. This image
retention is also known as “screen burn”. To avoid such image retention, reduce the degree of brightness and contrast of the
screen when displaying a still image.
•
Watching the LCD TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the left,
right and center of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen.
Playing a DVD or a game console may cause a similar effect to the screen.
Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by the Warranty.
• Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after-images.
To prevent this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ when displaying still images.
© 2008 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 1
2008-07-18 �� 10:23:58
English
Contents
General Information
Channel Control
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
List of Features...................................................................3
Accessories........................................................................3
Viewing the Control Panel..................................................4
Viewing the Connection Panel............................................5
Remote Control..................................................................7
Mini Remote Control...........................................................8
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control..........................8
Using the Remote Control Backlight Buttons.....................9
Connections
■ Connecting VHF and UHF Antennas..................................9
■ Connecting Cable TV.......................................................10
■ Connecting a DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite
receiver (Set-Top Box) via HDMI......................................11
■ Connecting a DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite
receiver (Set-Top Box) via DVI.........................................11
■ Connecting a DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite
receiver (Set-Top Box) via Component cables.................12
■ Connecting a Camcorder..................................................12
■ Connecting a VCR............................................................13
■ Connecting a Digital Audio System..................................14
■ Connecting an Amplifier/DVD Home Theater...................14
■ Connecting a PC..............................................................15
Operation
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Turning the TV On and Off...............................................16
Plug & Play Feature..........................................................16
Changing Channels..........................................................18
Adjusting the Volume........................................................18
Viewing the Display..........................................................19
Viewing the Menus...........................................................19
Using the TOOLS Button..................................................20
Memorizing the Channels.................................................20
Setting Up Your Remote Control......................................22
Remote Control Codes.....................................................24
To Select the Source........................................................27
To Edit the Input Source Name.........................................27
Picture Control
■
■
■
■
■
■
Changing the Picture Standard........................................28
Customizing the Picture Settings......................................28
Adjusting the Detailed Settings.........................................29
Resetting the Picture Settings to the Factory Defaults.....32
Configuring Picture Options..............................................33
Viewing Picture-in-Picture................................................38
Sound Control
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Changing the Sound Standard.........................................40
Customizing the Sound....................................................40
Setting the TruSurround XT..............................................41
Choosing Preferred Language.........................................42
Choosing a Multi-Channel Sound (MTS) track.................42
Automatic Volume Control................................................43
Selecting the Speaker......................................................43
Listening to the Sound of the Sub (PIP) Picture...............44
Resetting the Sound Settings to the Factory Defaults......45
Connecting Headphones (Sold separately)......................45
Managing Channels..........................................................46
Clearing Scrambled Channels - Digital.............................53
Fine Tuning Analog Channels...........................................53
Checking the Digital-Signal Strength................................54
PC Display
■ Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display.....................55
■ Display Modes..................................................................55
■ Setting up the TV with your PC........................................56
Time Setting
■ Setting the Clock..............................................................58
Function Description
■ Selecting a Menu Language.............................................62
■ Using the V-Chip...............................................................62
■ Viewing Closed Captions (On-Screen Text Messages)
- Analog............................................................................69
■ Viewing Closed Captions (On-Screen Text Messages)
- Digital.............................................................................70
■ Adjusting the TV On/Off Melody Sound............................71
■ Setting the Light Effect.....................................................71
■ Setting the Entertainment mode.......................................72
■ Using the Energy Saving Feature.....................................72
■ Upgrading the Software....................................................73
■ Self diagnosis ..................................................................74
WISELINK Pro
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Using the WISELINK Pro Function...................................75
Using the Photo List.........................................................77
Sorting Photo List.............................................................78
Viewing a Photo or Slide Show .......................................83
Using the Music List.........................................................87
Sorting Music List.............................................................88
Playing a Music File..........................................................92
Using the Movie List.........................................................94
Sorting Movie List.............................................................95
Playing a Movie File.........................................................98
Picture/Music Settings Using WISELINK........................100
Using the Setup Menu....................................................100
WISELINK Pro-DLNA
■
■
■
■
Setting the DLNA Network..............................................102
Installing the DLNA Application.......................................103
Using the DLNA Application............................................104
Using the DLNA Function...............................................109
Content Library
■ Using the Content Library............................................... 111
■ Using the TV Memory Contents.....................................112
■ Using Additional Content Using External USB Memory
Storage...........................................................................117
English - BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 1
2008-07-18 �� 10:23:58
Network Settings and InfoLink
Appendix
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Network Connection - Cable...........................................118
Network Connection - Wireless......................................120
Network selection...........................................................120
Cable Network Setup......................................................121
Wireless Network Setup.................................................123
Using InfoLink.................................................................126
InfoLink Setup.................................................................129
Product Guide.................................................................130
About Anynet+
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Troubleshooting..............................................................136
Installing the Stand.........................................................138
Disconnecting the Stand.................................................138
Auto Wall-Mount Adjustment (Sold separately) .............139
Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA)............................140
Using the Anti-Theft Kensington Lock............................141
Securing the TV to the Wall............................................142
Specifications.................................................................143
Dimensions.....................................................................144
What is Anynet+?...........................................................131
Connecting Anynet+ Devices.........................................131
Setting Up Anynet+ . ......................................................132
Scanning and Switching between Anynet+ Devices.......133
Recording.......................................................................134
Listening through a Receiver (Home theater).................134
Troubleshooting for Anynet+ .........................................135
Symbol
Press
Note
One-Touch Button
English - BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 2
2008-07-18 �� 10:23:58
General Information
List of Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Adjustable picture settings that can be stored in the TV’s memory.
Automatic timer to turn the TV on and off.
A special sleep timer.
Excellent Digital Interface & Networking :
With a built-in HD digital tuner, non-subscription HD broadcasts can be viewed with no Cable Box/Satellite receiver
(Set-Top Box) needed.
You can view News, Weather, and Stock information over the network (SAMSUNG InfoLink’s Service).
You can listen to music files and view pictures on USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices.
HDMI/DVI connection of your PC to this TV.
Excellent Picture Quality
- DNIe technology provides life-like clear images.
SRS TruSurround XT
- SRS TruSurround XT provides a virtual surround system.
Accessories
Please make sure the following items are included with your LCD TV. If any items are missing, contact your dealer.
Remote Control & Batteries
(AAA x 2)
(BN59-00700A)
Power Cord
(3903-000144)
Mini Remote Control &
Lithium battery (3V x 1ea)
(BN59-00788B)
Cleaning Cloth
(BN63-01798B)
Warranty Card /
Registration Card /
Safety Guide Manual
(Not available in all locations)
Owner’s Instructions
Program CD
(BN59-00726A)
Cover-Bottom
(LN46A850S1F, LN46A860S2F: BN63-04822B)
(LN52A850S1F, LN52A860S2F: BN63-04822B)
➣ The items color and shape may vary depending on the model.
English - BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 3
2008-07-18 �� 10:23:59
Viewing the Control Panel
Buttons on the Lower-Right Part of the Panel
The buttons on the lower-right panel control your TV’s basic features, including the on-screen menu.
To use the more advanced features, you must use the remote control.
8
8
67
Front Panel buttons
Touch each button to
operate.
1
2
3
4
5
➣ The product color and shape may vary depending on the model.
1 SOURCE
Toggles between all the available input sources
(TV, AV1, AV2, S-Video, Component1, Component2,
PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4). In the onscreen menu, use this button as you would use the
ENTER
button on the remote control.
5
2 MENU
Press to see an on-screen menu of your TV’s features.
7 REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR
Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV.
3 – VOL +
Press to increase or decrease the volume.
In the on-screen menu, use the – VOL + buttons as you
would use the ◄ and ► buttons on the remote control.
8SPEAKERS
4
(Power)
Press to turn the TV on and off.
6 POWER INDICATOR
Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up
in stand-by mode.
CH
Press to change channels.
In the on-screen menu, use the CH buttons as
you would use the ▼ and ▲ buttons on the remote
control.
English - BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 4
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:00
Viewing the Connection Panel
Use the connection panel jacks to connect A/V components that will be connected continuously, such as DVD/Blu-Ray
players or a VCR. For more information on connecting equipment, see pages 9~15.
[LN46A850S1F, LN52A850S1F]
[TV Side Panel]
[TV Rear Panel]
HDMI IN4
[LN46A860S2F, LN52A860S2F]
HDMI IN4
➣ The product color and shape may vary depending on the model.
English - BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 5
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:01
1 AUDIO OUT
Connects to the audio input jacks on your Amplifier/Home theater.
2 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Connects to a Digital Audio component.
3 PC IN [PC] / [AUDIO]
Connects to the video and audio output jacks on your PC.
4 HDMI IN 1, 2, 3, 4 / DVI IN(HDMI2)[R-AUDIO-L]
Connects to the HDMI jack of a device with an HDMI output.
- No sound connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection. Use the HDMI IN 2 jack for DVI connection to an
external device. Use a DVI to HDMI cable or DVI-HDMI adapter (DVI to HDMI) for video connection and the DVI IN
(HDMI2) [R-AUDIO-L] jacks for audio.
- When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2 jack.
5 ANT IN
Connects to an antenna or cable TV system.
6 WISELINK
Connect a USB mass storage device to view movies and photos and listen to music files.
You can connect to Samsung’s network wirelessly using the Wireless Infolink adapter (Sold separately).
7 AV IN 2
Video and audio inputs for external devices, such as a camcorder or VCR.
8
(HEADPHONE)
Connects a set of external headphones for private listening.
9 POWER INPUT
Connects the supplied power cord.
0 S-VIDEO
Connects an S-Video signal from a camcorder or VCR.
- Use the AV IN 1 [R-AUDIO-L] jacks for audio.
! COMPONENT IN 1, 2 / AV IN 1
Connects Component video/audio. The COMPONENT IN 1 jack is also used as the AV IN 1 jack.
- Connect the video cable to the COMPONENT IN 1 [Y/VIDEO] jack and the audio cable to the COMPONENT IN 1
[R-AUDIO-L] jacks.
@ LAN
Connect a LAN cable to this port to connect to the Network (SAMSUNG InfoLink’s Service). (See pages 118~119)
# EX-LINK
Connect this to the jack on the optional wall mount bracket. This will allow you to adjust the TV viewing angle using
your remote control.
$ KENSINGTON LOCK
The Kensington Lock (optional) is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place. If you want to
use a locking device, contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
➣ The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model.
English - BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 6
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:01
Remote Control
You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV. When using the remote, always point it
directly at the TV. You can also use your remote control to operate your VCR, DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite
receiver (Set-Top Box)
1 POWER
Turns the TV on and off.
& PRE-CH
Tunes to the previous channel.
2TV
Selects the TV mode directly.
* CH / CH
Press to change channels.
1
3 NUMERIC BUTTONS
Press to directly select the
channel.
( SOURCE
Press to display and select the
available video sources.
2
4
) W.LINK (WISELINK Pro)
This function enables you to
view and play photo, music and
movie files from an external
device. (Refer to pages 77
(Photo), 87 (Music) and 94
(Movie))
3
5
ress to select additional
P
channels (digital and analog)
being broadcast by the same
station. For example, to select
channel “54-3”, press “54”, then
press “ ” and “3”.
(MUTE)
ress to temporarily cut off the
P
sound.
6 VOL – / VOL +
Press to increase or decrease
the volume.
7 CH LIST
Used to display Channel Lists
on the screen.
8 TOOLS
Use to quickly select frequently
used functions.
9 INFO
Press to display information on
the TV screen.
0 COLOR BUTTONS
Use these buttons in the
Channel list, WISELINK Pro,
etc.
@ E.MODE
Press to select the preset
display and sound modes for
sports, cinema and games.
# Use these buttons in the DMA,
WISELINK Pro and Anynet+
modes.
: This remote can be
(
used to control recording on
Samsung recorders with the
Anynet+ feature)
$ SET
Sets the remote to control your
TV, VCR, DVD or Set-Top Box
VCR
DVD
STB
%
^
a MENU
Displays the main on-screen
menu.
4
5
&
b RETURN
Returns to the previous menu.
6
*
7
(
)
a
c U
P▲ / DOWN▼ / LEFT◄ /
RIGHT► / ENTER
Press the Up/Down/Left/Right
sections of the wheel button
and Enter to select on-screen
menu items and change menu
values.
You can navigate up and down
the menu, switch channels and
adjust the volume by turning
the wheel button. (See pages
18~19)
d EXIT
Press to exit the menu.
! CC
Controls the caption decoder.
TV
e DMA (Digital Media Adapter)
Use this when connecting
a SAMSUNG DMA device
through an HDMI interface and
switching to DMA mode.
For more information on the
operating procedures, refer to
the user manual of the DMA.
This button is available when
“Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)” is “On”.
(see page 132)
f INFO.L
Press to use the News, Stock
Market and Weather Forecast
information services available
over Samsung’s network.
(see page 126)
8
b
c
9
d
0
e
f
g
h
!
@
#
$
SET
RESET
i
% MODE
g FAV.CH
Press to operate your TV, DVD,
Press to switch to your favorite
STB or VCR (See pages 22~26)
channels. (see page 48)
TV
VCR
^
DVD
STB
ON/OFF
Press to backlight the buttons
on the remote. This function is
convenient for using at night or
when the room is dark. (Using
the remote control with the
ON/OFF light button set to On
will reduce the battery usage
time.) (See page 9)
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
h CONTENT
This function enables you to
view “Content Library”.
(see page 111)
i RESET
When your remote does not
work, change the batteries and
press the RESET button for 2-3
seconds before use.
➣ The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light.
English - BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 7
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:03
Mini Remote Control
The Mini Remote Control is a simplified remote control that consists of the power, channel
and volume buttons only.
1Television Standby button
➣ This button only works when you press it for longer than 1.5 seconds.
2
: Next channel
: Previous channel
3 + : Volume increase
– : Volume decrease
1
2
3
2
3
4
4 IrDA transmitter
➣ Use the Mini Remote Control so that this part faces the TV.
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
Normal Remote Control
1. Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure.
2. Install two AAA size batteries.
➣ Make sure to match the “+” and “–” ends of the batteries with the diagram inside the
compartment.
3. Replace the cover.
➣ Remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using the
remote control for a long time.
The remote control can be used up to about 23 feet from the TV.
(Assuming typical TV usage, the batteries should last for about one year.)
ON/OFF light button set to On will reduce the
➣ Using the remote control with the
battery usage time.
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Mini Remote Control
1.Turn the battery cover counterclockwise to unlock it and then separate the battery cover.
2.Insert the corresponding 3V Lithium battery.
3.Place the battery cover into the remote control aligning it with the grooves and then turn the
battery cover clockwise to lock the cover.
➣ If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following:
1. Is the TV power on?
2. Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed?
3. Are the batteries drained?
4. Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged?
5. Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby?
SET
RESET
English - BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 8
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:04
Using the Remote Control Backlight Buttons
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Use this feature in dark surroundings and when you are unable to see the remote control buttons clearly.
1. Press the
ON/OFF light button.
➣ Pressing the
ON/OFF light button toggles between ON and OFF.
➣ When ON, the button backlight is turned on for a moment.
➣ Pressing a remote control button when the remote control is on turns the button backlight on for a moment. If
you touch or move the remote control and the motion is detected by the sensor of the remote control, the button
backlight will be turned on for a moment.
➣ Since there is a vibrating device inside the remote control, shaking the remote control will result in a sound
generated by the device.
➣ The button backlight will not be turned on when the remote control is turned off.
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Connections
Connecting VHF and UHF Antennas
If your antenna has a set of leads that look like the diagram to the right, see “Antennas
with 300 Ω Flat Twin Leads” below.
SET
RESET
If your antenna has one lead that looks like the diagram to the right, see “Antennas with
75 Ω Round Leads”.
If you have two antennas, see “Separate VHF and UHF Antennas”.
SET
RESET
Antennas with 300 Ω Flat Twin Leads
If you are using an off-air antenna (such as a roof antenna or “rabbit ears”) that has 300
Ω twin flat leads, follow the directions below.
1.Place the wires from the twin leads under the screws on a 300-75 Ω adapter (not
supplied). Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws.
ANT IN
2. Plug the adaptor into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV.
Antennas with 75 Ω Round Leads
ANT IN
1. Plug the antenna lead into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV.
Separate VHF and UHF Antennas
If you have two separate antennas for your TV (one VHF and one UHF), you must combine the two antenna signals before
connecting the antennas to the TV. This procedure requires an optional combiner-adaptor (available at most electronics
shops).
1. Connect both antenna leads to the combiner.
UHF
VHF
2. Plug the combiner into the ANT IN terminal on the bottom of the rear panel.
ANT IN
UHF
VHF
English - BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 9
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:05
Connecting Cable TV
To connect to a cable TV system, follow the instructions below.
Cable without a Cable Box
1. Plug the incoming cable into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV.
➣ Because this TV is cable-ready, you do not need a cable box to view
unscrambled cable channels.
ANT IN
Connecting to a Cable Box that Descrambles All Channels
1. Find the cable that is connected to the ANT OUT terminal on your cable box.
➣ This terminal might be labeled “ANT OUT”, “VHF OUT” or simply, “OUT”.
2. Connect the other end of this cable to the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV.
ANT IN
ANT OUT
ANT IN
Connecting to a Cable Box that Descrambles Some Channels
If your cable box descrambles only some
channels (such as premium channels),
follow the instructions below. You will need
a two-way splitter, an RF (A/B) switch and
four lengths of RF cable. (These items are
available at most electronics stores.)
1.Find and disconnect the cable that is
connected to the ANT IN terminal on
your cable box.
➣ This terminal might be labeled
“ANT IN”, “VHF IN” or simply, “IN”.
ANT IN
Incoming
cable
2.Connect this cable to a two-way
splitter.
Incoming
cable
Splitter
Splitter
Cable Box
3.Connect an RF cable between the
OUTPUT terminal on the splitter and
the IN terminal on the cable box.
Incoming
cable
Splitter
RF (A/B)
Switch
Cable Box
4.Connect an RF cable between the
ANT OUT terminal on the cable box
and the B–IN terminal on the RF(A/B)
switch.
Incoming
cable
Splitter
Cable Box
5.Connect another cable between the
other OUT terminal on the splitter and
the A–IN terminal on the RF (A/B)
switch.
RF (A/B)
Switch
ANT IN
Incoming
cable
TV Rear
Splitter
Cable Box
RF (A/B)
Switch
6.Connect the last RF cable between the OUT terminal on the RF (A/B) switch and the ANT IN terminal on the rear of the
TV.
After you have made this connection, set the A/B switch to the “A” position for normal viewing. Set the A/B switch to the “B”
position to view scrambled channels. (When you set the A/B switch to “B”, you will need to tune your TV to the cable box’s
output channel, which is usually channel 3 or 4.)
English - 10
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 10
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:06
Connecting a DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) via HDMI
This connection can only be made if there is an HDMI Output connector on the external device.
1.Connect an HDMI Cable
between the HDMI IN
(1, 2, 3 or 4) jack on
the TV and the HDMI
jack on the DVD/BluRay player or Cable
Box/Satellite receiver
(Set-Top Box).
TV Side Panel
DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite
receiver (Set-Top Box) Rear Panel
TV Rear Panel
HDMI IN4
HDMI Cable (Not supplied)
or
➣ What is HDMI?
• HDMI(High-Definition Multimedia Interface), is an interface that enables the
transmission of digital audio and video signals using a single cable.
• The difference between HDMI and DVI is that the HDMI device is smaller in size and
has the HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) coding feature installed. DVI
also requires a separate audio connection (see below).
➣ Each DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) has a different
back panel configuration.
➣ The TV may not output sound and pictures may be displayed with abnormal color when
DVD/Blu-Ray players/Cable Boxes/Satellite receivers supporting HDMI versions older
than 1.3 are connected. When connecting an older HDMI cable and there is no sound,
connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN 2 jack and the audio cables to the DVI IN
(HDMI2) [R-AUDIO-L] jacks on the back of the TV. If this happens, contact the company
that provided the DVD/Blu-Ray player/Cable Box/Satellite receiver to confirm the HDMI
version, then request an upgrade.
➣ HDMI cables that are not 1.3 may cause annoying flicker or no screen display.
Connecting a DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) via DVI
This connection can only be made if there is a DVI Output connector on the external device.
1.Connect a DVI to HDMI
Cable or DVI-HDMI
Adapter between the
HDMI IN 2 jack on the
TV and the DVI jack on
the DVD/Blu-Ray player
or Cable Box/Satellite
receiver (Set-Top Box).
2.Connect Audio Cables
between the DVI IN
(HDMI 2) [R-AUDIO-L]
jack on the TV and the
DVD/Blu-Ray player
or Cable Box/Satellite
receiver (Set-Top Box).
TV Rear Panel
DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/
Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box)
2 Audio Cable (Not supplied)
1
DVI to HDMI Cable (Not supplied)
➣ Each DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) has a different
back panel configuration.
➣ When connecting a DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box),
match the color of the connection terminal to the cable.
➣ When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2 jack.
English - 11
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 11
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:07
Connecting a DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) via Component cables
The rear panel jacks on your TV make it easy to connect a DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) to
your TV.
1.Connect a Component
Cable between the
COMPONENT IN
(1 or 2) [Y, PB, PR]
jacks on the TV and the
COMPONENT
[Y, PB, PR] jacks on the
DVD/Blu-Ray player
or Cable Box/Satellite
receiver (Set-Top Box).
2.Connect Audio Cables
between the
COMPONENT IN(1 or 2)
[R-AUDIO-L] jacks on
the TV and the AUDIO
OUT jacks on the DVD/
Blu-Ray player or Cable
Box/Satellite receiver
(Set-Top Box).
TV Rear Panel
DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box /
Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box)
2
1
Audio Cable
(Not supplied)
Component Cable (Not supplied)
➣ Component video separates the video into Y (Luminance (brightness)), Pb (Blue) and
Pr (Red) for enhanced video quality.
Be sure to match the component video and audio connections.
For example, if connecting a Component video cable to COMPONENT IN 1, connect
the audio cable to COMPONENT IN 1 also.
➣ Each DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) has a different
back panel configuration.
➣ When connecting a DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box),
match the color of the connection terminal to the cable.
Connecting a Camcorder
The side panel jacks on your TV make it easy to connect a camcorder to your TV.
They allow you to view the camcorder tapes without using a VCR.
1.Connect a Video Cable
between the AV IN 2
[VIDEO] jack on the TV
and the VIDEO OUT
jack on the camcorder.
2.Connect Audio Cables
between the AV IN 2
[R-AUDIO-L] jacks on
the TV and the AUDIO
OUT jacks on the
camcorder.
TV Side Panel
HDMI IN4
Camcorder
1 Video Cable (Not supplied)
2 Audio Cable (Not supplied)
➣ Each Camcorder has a different back panel configuration.
➣ When connecting a Camcorder, match the color of the connection terminal to the cable.
English - 12
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 12
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:08
Connecting a VCR
Video Connection
These instructions assume that you have already connected your TV to an antenna or a cable TV system (according to the
instructions on pages 9~10). Skip step 1 if you have not yet connected to an antenna or a cable system.
1.Unplug the cable or
antenna from the back
of the TV.
2.Connect the cable or
antenna to the ANT IN
terminal on the back of
the VCR.
3.Connect an RF Cable
between the ANT OUT
terminal on the VCR
and the ANT IN terminal
on the TV.
4.Connect a Video Cable
between the VIDEO
OUT jack on the
VCR and the AV IN 1
[Y/VIDEO] or AV IN 2
[VIDEO] jack on the TV.
5.Connect Audio Cables
between the AUDIO
OUT jacks on the VCR
and the AV IN 1 (or AV
IN 2) [R-AUDIO-L] jacks
on the TV.
ANT IN
TV Rear Panel
VCR Rear Panel
TV Side Panel
HDMI IN4
5 Audio Cable (Not supplied)
4 Video Cable (Not supplied)
3 RF Cable (Not supplied)
Follow the instructions in “Viewing a VCR or Camcorder Tape” to view your VCR tape.
➣ Each VCR has a different back panel configuration.
➣ When connecting a VCR, match the color of the connection terminal to the cable.
➣ When connecting to AV IN 1, the color of the AV IN 1 [Y/VIDEO] jack (Green) does not
match the color of the video cable (Yellow).
➣ If you have a “mono” (non-stereo) VCR, use a Y-connector (not supplied) to connect to
the right and left audio input jacks of the TV. Alternatively, connect the cable to the “R”
jack. If your VCR is stereo, you must connect two cables.
S-Video Connection
Your Samsung TV can be connected to an S-Video jack on a VCR. (This connection delivers a better picture as compared
to a standard VCR.)
1.To begin, follow steps
TV Rear Panel
1–3 in the previous
section to connect the
VCR Rear Panel
antenna or cable to your
VCR and your TV.
2.Connect an S-Video
Cable between the
S-VIDEO OUT jack on
the VCR and the
3 Audio Cable (Not supplied)
[S-VIDEO] jack on the
TV.
2 S-Video Cable (Not supplied)
3.Connect Audio Cables
1 RF Cable (Not supplied)
between the AUDIO
OUT jacks on the VCR
and the AV IN 1
[R-AUDIO-L] jacks on
An S-Video cable may be included with a VCR. (If not, check your local electronics store.)
the TV.
➣ Each VCR has a different back panel configuration.
➣ When connecting a VCR, match the color of the connection terminal to the cable.
English - 13
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 13
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:10
Connecting a Digital Audio System
The rear panel jacks on your TV make it easy to connect a Digital Audio System (Home theater/Receiver) to your TV.
1.Connect an Optical Cable
between the “DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT (OPTICAL)” jacks on
the TV and the Digital Audio
Input jacks on the Digital Audio
System.
When a Digital Audio System
is connected to the “DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)” jack:
Decrease the volume of the
TV and adjust the volume
level with the system’s volume
control.
TV Rear Panel
Digital Audio System
Optical Cable (Not supplied)
➣ 5.1CH audio is possible when the TV is connected to an external device
supporting 5.1CH.
➣ Each Digital Audio System has a different back panel configuration.
➣ When the receiver (home theater) is set to On, you can hear sound output from
the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV(air) signal, the TV will
send out 5.1 channel sound to the Home theater receiver. When the source is
a digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only
2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver. If you want to
hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on
the DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable/Satellite Box directly to an Amplifier or Home
Theater, not the TV.
Connecting an Amplifier/DVD Home Theater
1.Connect Audio Cables
between the AUDIO OUT
[R-AUDIO-L] jacks on the TV
and AUDIO IN [R-AUDIO-L]
jacks on the Amplifier/DVD
Home Theater.
When an audio amplifier is
connected to the “AUDIO OUT
[R-AUDIO-L]” jacks: Decrease
the volume of the TV and
adjust the volume level with
the Amplifier’s volume control.
TV Rear Panel
Amplifier/DVD Home Theater
Audio Cable (Not supplied)
➣ Each Amplifier/DVD Home Theater has a different back panel configuration.
➣ When connecting an Amplifier/DVD Home Theater, match the color of the
connection terminal to the cable.
English - 14
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 14
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:11
Connecting a PC
Using the D-Sub Cable
1.Connect a D-Sub Cable
between PC IN [PC] connector
on the TV and the PC output
connector on your computer.
2.Connect a PC Audio Cable
between the PC IN [AUDIO]
jack on the TV and the Audio
Out jack of the sound card on
your computer.
TV Rear Panel
PC
2
PC Audio Cable (Not supplied)
1
D-Sub Cable (Not supplied)
Using the HDMI/DVI Cable
1.Connect an HDMI/DVI cable
between the HDMI IN 2 jack
on the TV and the PC output
jack on your computer.
2.Connect a 3.5 mm Stereo miniplug/2RCA Cable between the
DVI IN(HDMI2) [R-AUDIO-L]
jack on the TV and the Audio
Out jack of the sound card on
your computer.
TV Rear Panel
PC
2
3.5 mm Stereo mini-plug/2RCA Cable (Not supplied)
1
HDMI/DVI Cable (Not supplied)
➣ Each PC has a different back panel configuration.
➣ When connecting a PC, match the color of the connection terminal to the cable.
➣ When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2
terminal.
English - 15
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 15
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:13
Operation
Turning the TV On and Off
Press the POWER button on the remote control.
You can also use the POWER button on the TV.
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Plug & Play Feature
When the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently.
1.Press the POWER button on the remote control.
The message “Menu Language, Store Demo, Channels and Time will be set.”
is displayed.
Press the ENTER
button, then “Select Language of the OSD.” menu
is automatically displayed. Press the ENTER
button.
Plug & Play
Menu Language, Store Demo, Channels, and Time will
be set.
OK
Enter
Plug & Play
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select language, then press the ENTER
button.
The message “Select ‘Home Use’ when installing this TV in your home.” is
displayed.
Select Language of the OSD.
Menu Language
English
: English
Español
Français
Move
Enter
Plug & Play
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Store Demo” or “Home Use”, then
press the ENTER
button. The message “Select the Antenna source to
memorize.” is displayed.
➣ We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use” mode for the best picture in
your home environment.
➣ “Store Demo” mode is only intended for use in retail environments.
➣ If the unit is accidentally set to “Store Demo” mode and you want to return
to “Home Use” (Standard): Press the Volume button on the TV. When the
volume OSD is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for
5 seconds.
Select ‘Home Use’ when installing this TV in your
home.
Store Demo
Home Use
Move
Plug & Play
Select the Antenna source to memorize.
Air
Start
Cable
Start
Auto
Start
Move
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to memorize the channels of the selected
connection. Press the ENTER
button to select “Start”.
➣ Air: “Air” antenna signal.
Cable: “Cable” antenna signal.
Auto: “Air” and “Cable” antenna signals.
➣ In Cable mode, you can select the correct signal source among STD,
HRC, and IRC by pressing the ▲,▼,◄ or ► button, then press the
ENTER
button. If you have Digital cable, select the cable system
signal source for both Analog and Digital. Contact your local cable
company to identify the type of cable system that exists in your particular
area.
Enter
Enter
Skip
Auto Program
Selects the cable system.
SET
RESET
Analog
STD
HRC
IRC
Digital
STD
HRC
IRC
Start
Move
Enter
Skip
Plug & Play
Auto Program in Progress.
DTV Air : 02
DTV Cable : 23
Air : 11
Cable : 21
Cable 38
50%
Stop
Enter
Skip
English - 16
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 16
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:14
5.The TV will begin memorizing all of the available channels.
➣ To stop the search before it has finished, press the ENTER
button with
“Stop” selected.
After all the available channels are stored, it starts to remove scrambled
channels (see page 53). And then, the Auto program menu reappears. Press
the ENTER
button when channel memorization is complete. The message
“Set the Clock Mode.” is displayed.
Plug & Play
Removing scrambled channel.
DTV Air : 05
DTV Cable : 25
Air : 12
Cable : 32
DTV Cable 41
77%
Stop
Enter
Skip
Enter
Skip
Plug & Play
Auto Program is completed.
119 channels are memorized.
DTV Air : 05 Air : 24
DTV Cable : 10 Cable : 80
OK
6.Press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto”, then Press the ENTER
The message “Set to daylight saving time.” is displayed.
If you select “Manual”, “Set current date and time” is displayed.
(See page 58)
button.
Plug & Play
Set the Clock Mode.
Clock Mode
: Auto
Auto
Manual
Move
7.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “On” or “Auto”, then press the
ENTER
button. The message “Select the time zone in which you live.” is
displayed.
Enter
Skip
Enter
Skip
Plug & Play
Set to daylight saving time.
Off
: Auto
DST
On
Auto
Move
8.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to highlight the time zone for your local area. Press
the ENTER
button. If you have received a digital signal, the time will be
set automatically. If not, see page 58 to set the clock.
Select the time zone in which you live.
Newfoundland
Atlantic
Eastern
Central
Mountain
Pacific

Move
Enter
Skip
Plug & Play
9.The message “Enjoy your watching.” is displayed.
When you have finished, press the ENTER
button.
Enjoy your watching.
OK
button.
Setup
If you want to reset this feature...
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
2.Press the ENTER
button again to select “Plug & Play”.
For further details on setting up options, refer to the pages 16~17.
➣ The “Plug & Play” feature is only available in the TV mode.
Plug & Play
Language
: English
Time
Network selection
: Cable
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
English - 17
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 17
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:16
Changing Channels
Using the Channel Buttons
1. Press the CH or CH button to change channels.
➣ When you press the CH or CH button, the TV changes channels in
sequence.
You will see all the channels that the TV has memorized. (The TV must
have memorized at least three channels). You will not see channels that
were either erased or not memorized. See page 20 to memorize channels.
➣ To increase the channel number, turn the wheel clockwise when the
Channel Display is displayed. To decrease the channel number, turn the
wheel counterclockwise.
Using the Number Buttons
1.Press the number buttons to go directly to a channel. For example, to select
channel 27, press 2, then 7.
➣ For quick channel change, press the number buttons, then press the
ENTER
button.
Using the
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Button
The
button is used to select stations that broadcast a digital signal.
1.For example, for Channel 7-1, press 7, then , then 1.
➣ HD indicates the TV is receiving a Digital High Definition signal.
SD indicates the TV is receiving a Standard Definition signal.
➣ For quick channel change, press the number buttons, then press the
ENTER
button.
TV
VCR
SET
TV
STB
RESET
SET
TV
DVD
RESET
VCR
VCR
DVD
STB
DVD
STB
Using the PRE-CH Button to select the Previous Channel
1. Press the PRE-CH button. The TV will switch to the last channel viewed.
➣ To quickly switch between two channels that are far apart, tune to one
channel, then use the number button to select the second channel.
Then use the PRE-CH button to quickly alternate between them.
Adjusting the Volume
Using the Volume Button
1. Press the VOL – or VOL+ button to increase or decrease the volume.
TV
➣ To turn the volume up, turn the wheel clockwise when the Volume
Control window is displayed. To turn the volume down, turn the wheel
counterclockwise.
VCR
DVD
SET
RESET
SET
RESET
STB
Using the MUTE button
At any time, you can cut off the sound using the MUTE button.
1.Press MUTE button and the sound cuts off.
“
” is displayed on the screen.
2.To turn mute off, press the MUTE button again or simply press the
VOL – or VOL+ button.
SET
RESET
English - 18
SET
SET
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 18
RESET
RESET
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:17
Viewing the Display
The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video
settings.
1.Press the INFO button on the remote control.
The TV will display the channel, the type of sound, and the status of certain
picture and sound settings.
TV
TV #8
➣ Press the INFO button once more or wait approximately 10 seconds and
the display disappears automatically.
DTV Air
4-2
VCR
DVD
Sun, Sep 3 1:45 pm
Dolby Digital
♥
STB
1080i | 16:9 | English
Life On Venus Avenue
9:59 am - 10:59 am
No Detaild Information
SET VCR
TV
RESET STB
DVD
Viewing the Menus
1.With the power on, press the MENU button.
The main menu appears on the screen.
The menu’s left side has icons: Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup, Input,
Application.
Picture
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons.
Then press the ENTER
button to access the icon’s sub-menu.
➣ To move to a lower menu, turn the wheel clockwise when the menu Display
is displayed. To move to a higher menu, turn the wheel counterclockwise.
Mode
:Standard
Backlight
:7
Contrast
: 95
Brightness
: 45
Sharpness
: 50
Color
: 50
Tint (G/R)
: G50/R50
Detailed Settings
3.Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ The on-screen menus disappear from the screen after about one minute.
SET
SET
RESET
RESET
English - 19
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 19
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:17
Using the TOOLS Button
You can use the TOOLS button to select your frequently used functions quickly and easily. The “Tools” menu changes
depending on which external input mode you are viewing.
1.Press the TOOLS button. The “Tools” menu will appear.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a menu.
3.Press the ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTER
buttons to display, change, or use the selected
items. For a more detailed description of each function, refer to the corresponding
page.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tools
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC): see page 132
Multi-Track Sound: see page 42
Picture Size: see page 33
Picture Mode: see page 28
Sound Mode: see page 40
Sleep Timer: see page 60
Add to Favorite: see page 48
Switch to Cable (or Switch to Air): see page 20
PIP: see page 39
Auto Adjustment: see page 56
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Multi-Track Sound :
Stereo
Picture Size : 16:9
Picture Mode
:
Standard
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
Add to Favorite
Switch to Cable
Move
e Exit
Enter
SET
RESET
Memorizing the Channels
Your TV can memorize and store all of the available channels for both “off-air” (Air) and “Cable” channels. After the available
channels are memorized, use the CH or CH button to scan through the channels. This eliminates the need to change
channels by entering the channel digits. There are three steps for memorizing channels: selecting a broadcast source,
memorizing the channels (automatic) and adding or deleting channels (Channel Lists).
Selecting the Video Signal-source
Channel
Before your television can begin memorizing the available channels, you must
specify the type of signal source that is connected to the TV (i.e. an Air or a Cable
system).
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
Antenna
: Air
Auto Program
Clear Scrambled Channel
Channel List
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
Channel
button to select “Antenna”.
2.Press the ENTER
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Air” or “Cable”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Antenna
: Air
Air
Auto Program
Clear Scrambled Channel
Cable
Channel List
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
Tools
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Switch to Cable (or Switch to Air)”.
3. Press the ENTER
button to switch “Cable” (or “Air”).
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Multi-Track Sound :
Stereo
Picture Size : 16:9
Picture Mode
:
Standard
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
Add to Favorite
Switch to Cable
Move
Enter
e Exit
English - 20
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 20
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:18
Storing Channels in Memory (Automatic Method)
Channel
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Program”, then press the ENTER
button.
Antenna
: Air
Auto Program
Clear Scrambled Channel
Channel List
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the antenna connection, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ Air: “Air” antenna signal.
Cable: “Cable” antenna signal.
Auto: “Air” and “Cable” antenna signals.
Auto Program
Select the Antenna source to memorize.
Air
Start
Cable
Start
Auto
Start
Enter
Move
4.When selecting the Cable TV system:
Press the ENTER
button to start the auto program.
Press the ▲,▼, ◄ or ► to select the correct analog signal cable system
source among “STD”, “HRC”, and “IRC”.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Start”, then press the ENTER
button.
If you have Digital cable TV, select the cable system signal source for both
Analog and Digital.
➣ STD, HRC and IRC identify various types of cable TV systems. Contact
your local cable company to identify the type of cable system that exists in
your particular area. At this point the signal source has been selected.
Return
Auto Program
Selects the cable system.
Analog
STD
HRC
IRC
Digital
STD
HRC
IRC
Start
Move
Enter
Return
Auto Program
Auto Program in Progress.
DTV Cable : 12
Cable 38
50%
Cable : 32
Stop
Enter
Return
Auto Program
Removing scrambled channel.
5. The TV begins memorizing all available stations.
➣ After all the available channels are stored, it starts to remove scrambled
channels (see page 53). The Auto program menu then reappears.
➣ If you want to stop Auto Programming, press the ENTER
button.
The “Stop Auto Program?” message will be displayed. Select “Yes” by
pressing the ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
DTV Cable : 16
DTV Cable 41
77%
Cable : 45
Stop
Enter
Return
Auto Program
Stop Auto Program?
DTV Cable : 16
Cable : 45
77%
No
Yes
Enter
Move
Return
Auto Program
Auto Program is completed.
90 channels are memorized.
DTV Cable : 10 Cable : 80
OK
Enter
Return
English - 21
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 21
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:19
Setting Up Your Remote Control
After the television has been set up properly, your remote control can operate in
different modes: TV, VCR, DVD, Set-Top Box. Pressing the corresponding
button on the remote control allows you to switch between these modes and
control whichever piece of equipment you choose.
➣ The remote control might not be compatible with all DVD Players, VCRs, and SetTop Boxes.
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Setting Up the Remote to Operate Your VCR
1.Turn off your VCR. 2. Press the MODE button and make sure that the VCR LED is illuminated.
3. Press the SET button on your TV’s remote control.
4.Using the number buttons on your remote control, enter three digits of the VCR
code listed on page 24 of this manual for your brand of VCR. Make sure you enter
three digits of the code, even if the first digit is a “0”.
(If more than one code is listed, try the first one.)
5.Press the POWER button on the remote control.
Your VCR should turn on if your remote is set up correctly.
If your VCR does not turn on after set up, repeat steps 2, 3 and 4, but try one of
the other codes listed for your brand of VCR.
If no other codes are listed, try each VCR code, 000 through 080.
SET
RESET
Note on Using Remote Control Modes: VCR
When your remote control is in VCR mode, the volume buttons still control your
TV’s volume.
Setting Up the Remote to Operate Your DVD
TV
1.Turn off your DVD.
2. Press the MODE button and make sure that the DVD LED is illuminated.
3. Press the SET button on your TV’s remote control.
4.Using the number buttons on your remote control, enter three digits of the DVD
code listed on pages 25 of this manual for your brand of DVD.
Make sure you enter three digits of the code, even if the first digit is a “0”.
(If there is more than one code listed, try the first one.)
5.Press the POWER button on the remote control.
Your DVD should turn on if your remote is set up correctly.
VCR
DVD
SET
RESET
SET
RESET
SET
RESET
STB
If your DVD does not turn on after set up, repeat steps 2, 3 and 4, but try one of
the other codes listed for your brand of DVD.
If no other codes are listed, try each code, 000 through 141.
➣ Note on Using Remote Control Modes: DVD
When your remote control is in DVD mode, the volume buttons still control your
TV’s volume.
English - 22
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 22
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:19
Setting Up the Remote to Operate Your STB
1.Turn off your STB.
2. Press the MODE button and make sure that the STB LED is illuminated.
3. Press the SET button on your TV’s remote control.
4.Using the number buttons on your remote control, enter three digits of the STB
code listed on page 26 of this manual for your brand of STB.
Make sure you enter three digits of the code, even if the first digit is a “0”.
(If there is more than one code listed, try the first one.)
5.Press the POWER button on the remote control.
Your STB should turn on if your remote is set up correctly.
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
If your STB does not turn on after set-up, repeat steps 2, 3 and 4, but try one of
the other codes listed for your brand of STB.
(If no other codes are listed, try each code, 000 through 074.)
➣ Note on Using Remote Control Modes: STB
When your remote control is in STB mode, the volume buttons still control your
TV’s volume.
SET
RESET
Setting Up the Remote to Operate Your Cable Box
1.Turn off your Cable Box.
2. Press the MODE button and make sure that the STB LED is illuminated.
3. Press the SET button on your TV’s remote control.
4.Using the number buttons on your remote control, enter three digits of the cable
box code listed on page 26 of this manual for your brand of cable box. Make sure
you enter three digits of the code, even if the first digit is a “0”. (If there is more
than one code listed, try the first one.)
5.Press the POWER button on the remote control.
Your cable box should turn on if your remote is set up correctly.
TV
VCR
DVD
SET
RESET
SET
RESET
SET
RESET
STB
If your cable box does not turn on after set up, repeat steps 2, 3 and 4, but try one
of the other codes listed for your brand of cable box. If no other codes are listed,
try each code, 000 through 046.
➣ Note on Using Remote Control Modes: STB
When your remote control is in STB mode, the volume buttons still control your
TV’s volume.
English - 23
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 23
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:20
Remote Control Codes
➣ VCR
Brand
SAMSUNG
ADMIRAL
AIWA
AKAI
AUDIO DYNAMICS
BELL&HOWELL
BROKSONIC
CANDLE
CANON
CITIZEN
COLORTYME
CRAIG
CURTIS MATHES
DAEWOO
DB
DIMENSIA
DYNATECH
ELECTROHOME
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
GENERAL ELECTRIC
GO VIDEO
HARMAN KARDON
HITACHI
INSTANT REPLAY
JC PENNEY
JCL
JVC
KENWOOD
KLH
KONIA
LG(Goldstar)
LIOYD
LOGIK
LXI
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MARTA
MEI
MEMOREX
MGA
MIDLAND
MINOLTA
MITSUBISHI
Code
000 001 002 003 004 005 077 078 079
020
025
004 027 032
007 026
018
022
002 003 006 008 015 055
021 056
002 003 006 008 015 055
007
002 024
002 007 008 017 021 025 056 064 066
003 010 011 012 013 014 015 016
007 026
017
025
034
001 003 006 021 022 025 030 032 034 040
047 050 052 060 063 065 066 067 069 073
018 024 028 029 048 051 061
025
002 005 017 021 056
002
007
019 025 041 042 074
021
002 007 018 019 021 026 037 041 054 056
007 008 018 021 026 037
081 082 083
007 008 018 026 037
070
036
006 007 008 009 010
025
038
025
021 056 059
007 008 018 021 026 037 062
006
021
006 021 024 025
034
005
019 041 075
019 034 041 046
Brand
MONTGOMERY WARD
MTC
MULTITECH
NEC
OPTIMUS
ORION
PANASONIC
PENTAX
PENTEX RESEARCH+
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PORTLAND
PROSCAN
QUARTZ
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK/
REALISTIC
RCA
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SHIMTOM
SIGNATURE
SONY
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
TANDY
TASHIKA
TATUNG
TEAC
TECHNICS
TEKNIKA
TMK
TOSHIBA
TOTEVISION
UNITECH
VECTOR RESEARCH
VICTOR
VIDEO CONCEPTS
VIDEOSONIC
WARDS
YAMAHA
ZENITH
Code
020
002 025
002 005 025 038
007 008 018 026 037 062 064
020
073 074 075 076
021 056 071 072
019 041 075
008
021 056 059
021 080
019 026 039 053
015 049 055
017
018
021 056
006 018 020 021 024 025 029 034 048 056
002 017 019 021 035 041 043 057 068 076
026
018 024
003 047 052 067
006 018 019 024 028 029 041 048 051
020 034 045 015
027 033 038 058
025
027 033 044
021 025 056 059
025
018 025
006
037
025 037 068
021
006 021 025 031
066
003 019 029 051 052
002 006
002
007 026
026
007 026
002
002 003 006 019 020 021 024 025 034 038 041
007 008 018 026 037
023 027 033
English - 24
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 24
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:20
➣ SAMSUNG DVD
Product
DVD
DVDR
BD Record
VCR COMBO
VCR Record
DHR COMBO
Code
000 001 002 022
003 004
005 006
007 008 009 010 011
012
013
Product
Home Theater VCR COMBO
HDD Recorder COMBO
TWIN TRAY COMBO
STB DVD COMBO
DVD Receiver
AV Receiver
Code
030
075
085
072
070 071
114
062
074
122 123
027
077 078
080 125
081
065
095
066
146
067 068
090
060
061 089
069 074
074
064 113
071
073
091 110
089
092
091
022 033
073
051 108
073
059 100
074 075
025 031
057
058
054
055
056
076 093
074 094
073
Brand
NORCENT
NEXT BASE
NEC
NANTAUS
NESA
OPTOMEDIA ELECTRONICS
OPTIVIEW
ONKYO
PHILCO
PRINCETON
PROSCAN
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
ROTEL
RIO
RCA
RAITE
ROWA
SAMPO
SONY
SHERWOOD
SVA
SYLVANIA
SHARP
SANSUI
SANYO
SHINSONIC
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
TECHNICS
TVIEW
TOKAI
TEAC
TECHWOOD
TREDEX
URBAN CONCEPTS
VENTURER
VOCOPRO
YAMAHA
YAMAKAWA
XWAVE
ZENITH
Code
014 015 016
017
018
019
020
021
➣ DVD
Brand
ANAM
AUDIOVOX
AUDIOLOGIC
ANABA
APEX DIGITAL
AIWA
BROKSONIC
BLAUPUNKT
B&K
CURTIS MATHES
CYBER HOME
CLARION
CIRRUS
CYBER HOME
CINEVISION
DAEWOO
DENON
FARENHEIT
FISHER
GPX
GO VIDEO
GE
GREENHILL
HITACHI
HITEKER
HOYO
HARMAN / KARDON
IRT
INTEGRA
JBL
JVC
JATON
KENWOOD
KISS
KONKA
KLH
LG(Goldstar)
LOEWE
LASONIC
MOBILE AUTHORITY
MEMOREX
MALATA
MAGNAVOX
MINTEK
MONYKA
074 086 083 084 088 111 112
079 082
133 135
115 116
109
106 107
Code
048 049
052
053
144
074
105
072
076 092
044 045
046 047
023
024 034
036 076
037 143
117 118
120
023 035
073
038
104
026 029
039 041
042
043 093
140
062
062 090
094
145
028 062
139
072
073
096
097
098 099
076
075
102
032 063
040 073
103
076 121
050
119
124 134 136 137 138
074 075 131 132
126 127 128 129 130 141
076
101
English - 25
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 25
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:20
➣ SAMSUNG SET-TOP BOX
Product
Ground wave STB
CABLE STB
Satellite STB
Code
000 001
000 004
075 076
000 003
002
008
077
008
008 013
009 010 011 012 013 014
078 079 080 081 082
013
➣ SET-TOP BOX, CABLE BOX
Brand
ALPHASTAR
ANAM
CHANNEL MASTER
CROSSDIGITAL
CHAPARRAL
DIRECT TV
DAEWOO
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
DISHPRO
DRAKE
DX ANTENNA
ECHOSTAR
EXPRESSVU
GE
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
GI
GOI
Hamlin
HTS
HOME CABLE
HITACHI
HUGHES NETWORK
IQ
IQ PRISM
JANEIL
JERROLD
JVC
LG(Goldstar)
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
MOTOROLA
MACOM
MITSUBISHI
NEXT LEVEL
Code
023
043
018 034
019
035
015 016
065 066
074
069 070
069
018 024
027
025 069
069
065
046 047
116
069
078 099
069
056
022 100
015 017
020
020
059
063 113
069 070
044 073
016 021
098 103
016
064
018 100
015
047 048
Brand
Oak
PHILIPS
017 019 022 045 060 061 062
067 068
032
070 071
Pioneer
PRIMESTAR
PANASONIC
PAYSAT
PROSCAN
RCA
RADIOSHACK
REALISTIC
Regal
Regency
SA
samsung
048 063 064
106
105
114
036 038 039 040 041 042 084
105
064
Scientific Atlanta
STAR TRAK
STS
SKY
SKY LIFE
SHACK
STAR CHOICE
SONY
Sprucer
Stargate 2000
Sylvania
Texscan
Tocom
TOSHIBA
ULTIMATE TV
UNIDEN
Universal
viewstar
wamer amex
ZENITH
Code
101
015 016
041 042
093 095
046 049
058 059
016
065 066
051 052
064
057
078
090 098
117 118
000 001
012 013
076 077
117 118
026
020 027
031
005 006
064
064
054 060
097
111
091
091
107
015 017
060 066
016 021
108 109
094 096
121
024 031
017 021 033 036 038 039 040
067 094 096 098 103
079 119
050 063
061 062 078 097 102 112 119
053 065 066 089 097 115
002 003 004 008 009 010 011
014 075 080 078 079 081 082
007
028 029 030 072
037 055 056 057
098 103
068 092 104 110 112 120
English - 26
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 26
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:20
To Select the Source
Input
Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD players or Cable
Box/Satellite receivers (Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input
source of your choice.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Input”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ENTER
button to select “Source List”.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select signal source, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Available signal sources: TV, AV1, AV2, S-Video, Component1,
Component2, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB, DLNA.
➣ You can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV.
In the “Source List”, connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the
top. Inputs that are not connected will be sorted to the bottom.
➣ If each USB device is connected to 2 WISELINK jacks, each is shown as
“USB1”, “USB2” in order of reading.
➣ Using the Color buttons on the remote with the Source list
Source List
Edit Name
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Source List
TV
• Red (Refresh): Refreshes the connecting external devices.
• TOOLS (Option): Displays the “Edit Name” and “Information” menus.
AV1 ----
AV2 ----
S-Video
----
Component1
----
Component2
Refresh
---Option
O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view an external signal
source.
To Edit the Input Source Name
Input
Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Input”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Edit Name”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “AV1”, “AV2”, “S-Video”, “Component1”,
“Component2”, “PC”, “HDMI1”, “HDMI2/DVI”, “HDMI3”, “HDMI4” input jack,
then press the ENTER
button.
Source List
Edit Name
Edit Name
AV1
: ----
AV2
: ----
S-Video
: ----
Component1
: ----
Component2
PC
HDMI1
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “VCR”, “DVD”, “Cable STB”,
“Satellite STB”, “PVR STB”, “AV Receiver”, “Game”, “Camcorder”, “PC”,
“TV”, “IPTV”, “Blu-Ray”, “HD DVD”, “DMA” input source, then press the
ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080@60Hz is connected to the
HDMI IN 2 port, you should set the “HDMI2/DVI” mode to “PC” in the “Edit
Name” of the “Input” mode.
►
: ---SET
: ----
RESET
: ---▼
Move
Enter
Return
Edit Name
AV1
AV2
S-Video
Component1
Component2
PC
HDMI1
: ----
----
: ----VCR
: ---DVD
: ---Cable STB
: ---Satellite STB
: ---PVR STB
: ---▼
Move
Enter
Return
English - 27
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 27
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:21
Picture Control
Changing the Picture Standard
Picture
You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing
requirements.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ENTER
button to select “Picture”.
Mode
:Standard
Backlight
:7
Contrast
: 95
Brightness
: 45
Sharpness
: 50
Color
: 50
Tint (G/R)
: G50/R50
Detailed Settings
• Dynamic: Selects the picture for high-definition in a bright room.
• Standard: Selects the picture for the optimum display in a normal
environment.
• Movie: Selects the picture for viewing movies in a dark room.
Picture
2.Press the ENTER
button to select “Mode”. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to
select “Dynamic”, “Standard” or “Movie”. Press the ENTER
button.
Mode
:Dynamic
Backlight
: 7 Standard
Contrast
: 95Movie
Brightness
3.Press the EXIT button to exit.
►
Dynamic
: 45
Sharpness
: 50
Color
: 50
Tint (G/R)
: G50/R50
Detailed Settings
Tools
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture Mode”.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the required option.
4. Press the EXIT or TOOLS button to exit.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Multi-Track Sound :
Stereo
Picture Size : 16:9
Picture Mode
◄
Standard
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
►
Add to Favorite
Switch to Cable
Move
Adjust
e Exit
Customizing the Picture Settings
Picture
Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality.
1.To select the desired picture mode, follow the “Changing the Picture
Standard” instructions numbers 1 and 2.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Backlight”, “Contrast”, “Brightness”,
“Sharpness”, “Color” or “Tint(G/R)”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to decrease or increase the value of a particular
item. Press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ When you make changes to “Backlight”, “Contrast”, “Brightness”,
“Sharpness”, “Color” or “Tint(G/R)”, the OSD will be adjusted accordingly.
➣ In PC mode, you can only make changes to “Backlight”, “Contrast” and
“Brightness”.
➣ Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have
connected to an input of the TV.
➣ The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level
of brightness of the picture is reduced, and that this will reduce the overall
running cost.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mode
: Standard
Backlight
:7
Contrast
: 95
Brightness
: 45
Sharpness
: 50
Color
: 50
Tint (G/R)
: G50/R50
Detailed Settings
Picture Options
Backlight
Move
7
Adjust
Enter
Return
Backlight: Adjusts the brightness of LCD back light.
Contrast: Adjusts the contrast level of the picture.
Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level of the picture.
Sharpness: Adjusts the edge definition of the picture.
Color: Adjusts color saturation of the picture.
Tint(G/R): Adjusts the color tint of the picture.
English - 28
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 28
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:21
Adjusting the Detailed Settings
Samsung’s new TVs allow you to make even more precise picture settings than previous models. See below to adjust
detailed picture settings.
Activating Detailed Settings
Picture
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ENTER
button to select “Picture”.
2.Press the ENTER
button to select “Mode”.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Standard” or “Movie”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ “Detailed Settings” is available in “Standard” or “Movie” mode.
Mode
:Movie
Backlight
:5
Contrast
: 95
Brightness
: 45
Sharpness
: 20
Color
: 50
Tint (G/R)
: G50/R50
Detailed Settings
Picture
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Detailed Settings”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ In PC mode, you can only make changes to “Dynamic Contrast”,
“Gamma” and “White Balance” from among the “Detailed Settings” items.
Color
: 50
Tint (G/R)
: G50/R50
Detailed Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Detailed Settings
Setting the Black adjust
You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Black adjust”, then press the ENTER
button.
5.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “Low”, “Medium” or “High”.
Press the ENTER
button.
•
•
•
•
Off: Turns off the black adjustment function.
Low: Sets the black color depth to low.
Medium: Sets the black color depth to medium.
High: Sets the black color depth to high.
Black Adjust
: Off
Dynamic Contrast
: Off
►
Gamma
:0
Color Space
: Auto
White Balance
Flesh Tone
:0
Edge Enhancement
: Off
▼
Move
Enter
Off
Low
Black Adjust
Medium
:
High
Move
Setting the Dynamic Contrast
Enter
Return
Detailed Settings
You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided.
6.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Dynamic Contrast”, then press the
ENTER
button.
7.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “Low”, “Medium” or “High”.
Press the ENTER
button.
•
•
•
•
Return
Off: Turns off the dynamic contrast adjustment function.
Low: Sets the dynamic contrast to low.
Medium: Sets the dynamic contrast to medium.
High: Sets the dynamic contrast to high.
Black Adjust
: Off
Dynamic Contrast
: Off
Gamma
:0
Color Space
: Auto
►
White Balance
Flesh Tone
:0
Edge Enhancement
: Off
▼
Move
Enter
Return
Off
Low
Dynamic Contrast
:
Move
Medium
High
Enter
Return
English - 29
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 29
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:22
Adjusting the Gamma
You can adjust the Primary Color (Red, Green, Blue) Intensity. (-3 ~ +3)
8.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Gamma”, then press the ENTER
button.
9.Press the ◄ or ► button to decrease or increase the value.
Press the ENTER
button.
Detailed Settings
Black Adjust
: Off
Dynamic Contrast
: Off
Gamma
:0
Color Space
: Auto
►
White Balance
Flesh Tone
:0
Edge Enhancement
: Off
▼
Move
Enter
Return
Gamma
0
Adjust
Setting the Color Space
Enter
Return
Detailed Settings
Color space is a color matrix composed of red, green and blue colors.
Select your favorite color space to experience the most natural color.
10.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Color Space”, then press the ENTER
button.
11. Press the ENTER
button again to select “Color Space”.
12. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto”, “Native” or “Custom”.
Press the ENTER
button.
• Auto: Auto Color Space automatically adjusts to the most natural color
tone based on program sources.
• Native: Native Color Space offers deep and rich color tone.
• Custom: Adjusts the color range to suit your preference.
(see “Customizing the Color Space”)
Black Adjust
: Off
Dynamic Contrast
: Off
Gamma
:0
Color Space
: Auto
►
White Balance
Flesh Tone
:0
Edge Enhancement
: Off
▼
Move
Enter
Return
Color Space
Color Space
: Auto
Color
: Red
Red
50
Green
0
Blue
0
Reset
Enter
Auto
Customizing the Color Space
Native
button.
13.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Color”, then press the ENTER
➣ “Color” is available when “Color Space” is set to “Custom”.
14.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Red”, “Green”, “Blue”, “Yellow”, “Cyan” or
“Magenta”. Press the ENTER
button.
15.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Red”, “Green”, or “Blue” to change it.
Press the ENTER
button.
16.Press the ◄ or ► button to decrease or increase the value of a particular
item. Press the ENTER
button.
➣ In “Color”, you can adjust the RGB values for the selected color.
➣ To reset the adjusted RGB value, select “Reset”.
•
•
•
•
Return
Color Space
:
Move
Enter
Return
Color Space
Color Space
: Custom
Color
: Red
Red
50
Green
0
Blue
0
Reset
Red: Adjusts the red saturation level of the selected color.
Green: Adjusts the green saturation level of the selected color.
Blue: Adjusts the blue saturation level of the selected color.
Reset: Resets the color space to the default values.
➣ Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen.
➣ Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have
connected to an input of the TV. For example, if you have a DVD player
connected to HDMI 1 and it is currently selected, settings and adjustments
will be saved for the DVD player.
Custom
Move
Enter
Return
Red
Green
Blue
Yellow
Cyan
Color
: Magenta
Move
Enter
Return
Color Space
Red
English - 30
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 30
50
Move
Adjust
Enter
Return
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:22
Adjusting the White Balance
You can adjust the color temperature for more natural picture colors.
17.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “White Balance”, then press the
ENTER
button.
18.Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the
ENTER
button.
19.Press the ◄ or ► button to decrease or increase the value of a particular
item. Press the ENTER
button.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
R-Offset: Adjusts the red color darkness.
G-Offset: Adjusts the green color darkness.
B-Offset: Adjusts the blue color darkness.
R-Gain: Adjusts the red color brightness.
G-Gain: Adjusts the green color brightness.
B-Gain: Adjusts the blue color brightness.
Reset: The previously adjusted white balance will be reset to the
factory defaults.
➣ Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen.
Detailed Settings
Black Adjust
: Off
Dynamic Contrast
: Off
Gamma
:0
Color Space
: Auto
White Balance
Flesh Tone
►
:0
Edge Enhancement
: Off
▼
Enter
Move
Return
White Balance
R-Offset
25
G-Offset
25
B-Offset
25
R-Gain
25
G-Gain
25
B-Gain
25
Reset
Move
Enter
Return
White Balance
R-Offset
25
Move
Adjusting the Flesh Tone
Adjust
Enter
Return
Detailed Settings
You can emphasize the pink ‘flesh tone’ in the picture.
20.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Flesh Tone”, then press the ENTER
button.
21.Press the ◄ or ► button to decrease or increase the value.
Press the ENTER
button.
➣ Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen.
Black Adjust
: Off
Dynamic Contrast
: Off
Gamma
:0
Color Space
: Auto
White Balance
Flesh Tone
: 0
Edge Enhancement
: Off
►
▼
Enter
Move
Return
Flesh Tone
0
Adjust
Enter
Return
Detailed Settings
Setting the Edge Enhancement
▲
You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture.
22.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Edge Enhancement”, then press the
ENTER
button.
23. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off” or “On”. Press the ENTER
button.
Dynamic Contrast
: Off
Gamma
:0
Color Space
: Auto
White Balance
Flesh Tone
:0
Edge Enhancement
: Off
xvYCC
: Off
Move
►
Enter
Return
Enter
Return
Off
Edge Enhancement
Move
: On
English - 31
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 31
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:22
Setting the xvYCC
Setting the xvYCC mode to “On” increases detail and color space when watching
movies from an external device (ie. DVD player) connected to the HDMI or
Component IN jacks.
24.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “xvYCC”, then press the ENTER
button.
25.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off” or “On”.
Press the ENTER
button.
➣ “xvYCC” is available when the picture mode is set to “Movie”, and the
external input is set to “HDMI” or “Component” mode.
Detailed Settings
▲
Dynamic Contrast
: Off
Gamma
:0
Color Space
: Auto
White Balance
Flesh Tone
:0
Edge Enhancement
: Off
xvYCC
: Off
►
Move
Enter
Return
Enter
Return
Off
xvYCC
: On
Move
Resetting the Picture Settings to the Factory Defaults
1.To select the desired picture mode, follow the “Changing the Picture
Standard” instructions numbers 1 and 2. (see page 28)
Picture
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture Reset”, then press the ENTER
button.
Detailed Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Reset Picture Mode” or “Cancel”, then
press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
• Reset Picture Mode: All picture values in the current picture mode
return to default settings.
• Cancel: Does not perform a screen reset.
Picture Reset
Does not perform a screen reset.
➣ Each mode can be reset.
Reset Picture Mode
Move
Cancel
Enter
Return
English - 32
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 32
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:23
Configuring Picture Options
Activating Picture Options
Tint (G/R)
: G50/R50
Detailed Settings
Picture
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ENTER
button to select “Picture”.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture Options”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a particular item. Press the ENTER
button.
➣ When you are satisfied with your setting, press the ENTER
button.
➣ In PC mode, you can only make changes to the “Color Tone” and “Size” from
among the items in “Picture Options”.
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Setting the Color Tone
1.Follow the “Activating Picture Options” instructions numbers 1 and 2.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Color Tone”, then press the ENTER
button.
Picture Options
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Cool2”, “Cool1”, “Normal”, “Warm1” or
“Warm2”. Press the ENTER
button.
➣ “Warm1” or “Warm2” is only activated when the picture mode is “Movie”.
➣ Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have
connected to an input of the TV.
•
•
•
•
•
•
: Off
▼
Move
Enter
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
: Off
Cool2
Cool1
Normal
Warm1
Warm2
Move
16:9 : Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode.
Zoom1: Magnifies the size of the picture on the screen.
Zoom2: Magnifies the size of the picture more than “Zoom1”.
Wide Fit: Enlarges the aspect ratio of the picture to fit the entire screen.
4:3 : Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode.
Just Scan: Use the function to see the full image without any cutoff
when HDMI (720p/1080i/1080p), Component (1080i/1080p) or DTV
(1080i) signals are input.
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture Size”.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the required option.
4. Press the EXIT or TOOLS button to exit.
Return
Picture Options
Setting the Screen Size
Occasionally, you may want to change the size of the image on your screen. Your
TV comes with six screen size options, each designed to work best with specific
types of video input. Your cable box or satellite receiver may have its own set of
screen sizes as well. In general, though, you should view the TV in 16:9 mode as
much as possible.
1.Follow the “Activating Picture Options” instructions numbers 1 and 2.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Size”, then press the ENTER
button.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the screen format you want.
Press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
►
Enter
Return
Picture Options
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
►
: Off
▼
Move
Enter
Return
Enter
Return
Size
16:9
Zoom1
Zoom2
Wide Fit
4:3
Just Scan
Move
Tools
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Multi-Track Sound :
Stereo
Picture Size ◄
16:9
Picture Mode
:
Standard
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
►
Add to Favorite
Switch to Cable
English - 33
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 33
Move
Adjust
e Exit
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:23
➣ When Double (
,
) mode has been set in PIP, the Picture Size cannot be set.
➣ Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours.
➣ After selecting “Zoom1”, “Zoom2” or “Wide Fit”:
Size
Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Position”, then press the ENTER
16:9
button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the picture up and down.
Zoom1
Position
Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Reset”, then press the
ENTER
button. You can initialize the setting.
Zoom2
Reset
Wide Fit
4:3
Just Scan
Adjust
➣ After selecting “Just Scan” in HDMI (1080i/1080p) or Component
(1080i/1080p) mode:
Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Position”, then press the ENTER
button. Press the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture.
Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Reset”, then press the
ENTER
button. You can initialize the setting.
Enter
Return
Size
16:9
Zoom1
Zoom2
Wide Fit
4:3
➣ HD (High Definition)
16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080), 720p (1280x720)
Just Scan
Position
Adjust
Enter
Reset
Return
➣ Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV.
Input Source
Picture Size
ATV, AV, S-Video, Component (480i, 480p)
16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3
DTV(1080i), Component (1080i, 1080p), HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080P)
16:9, 4:3, Wide Fit, Just Scan
PC
16:9, 4:3
16:9
16:9
Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode.
Wide Fit U Move
Wide Fit
Enlarges the aspect ratio of the
picture to fit the entire screen.
Zoom1 U Move
Zoom1
Magnifies the size of the picture on
the screen.
Zoom2 U Move
Zoom2
Magnifies the size of the picture more
than “Zoom1”.
4:3
Just Scan
4:3
Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode.
Just Scan
Use the function to see the full
image without any cutoff when HDMI
(720p/1080i/1080p), Component
(1080i/1080p) or DTV (1080i) signals
are input.
English - 34
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 34
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:24
Setting the Digital Noise Reduction
If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital
Noise Reduction feature to help reduce any static and ghosting that may appear
on the screen.
1.Follow the “Activating Picture Options” instructions numbers 1 and 2.
(Refer to page 33)
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Digital NR”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “Low”, “Medium”, “High” or “Auto”.
Press the ENTER
button.
•
•
•
•
•
Off: Turns the screen noise reduction function off.
Low: Reduces screen noise at a low level.
Medium: Reduces screen noise at a medium level.
High: Reduces screen noise at a high level.
Auto: Automatically recognizes and reduces screen noise.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Picture Options
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
►
: Off
▼
Move
Enter
Return
Picture Options
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
Off
DNle
: OffLow
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Medium
Film Mode
: OffHigh
Blue Only Mode
: OffAuto
Move
Enter
Return
Setting the DNIe (Digital Natural Image engine)
This TV includes the DNIe function to provide high visual quality. If you set DNIe
to on, you can view the screen with the DNIe feature activated.
1.Follow the “Activating Picture Options” instructions numbers 1 and 2.
(Refer to page 33)
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “DNIe”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off” or “On”, then press the ENTER
button.
Picture Options
Color Tone
: Cool1
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: On
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
Move
Enter
Return
Picture Options
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ DNIe™ (Digital Natural Image engine)
This feature brings you a more detailed image with 3D noise reduction
and detail, contrast and white enhancement.
➣ “DNIe” is only available in “Dynamic” mode.
Color Tone
: Cool1
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: On
Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
On
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
: Off
Move
Setting the HDMI Black Level
You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth.
1.Follow the “Activating Picture Options” instructions numbers 1 and 2.
(Refer to page 33)
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “HDMI Black Level”, then press the
ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Normal” or “Low”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Enter
Return
Picture Options
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
• Normal: The screen gets brighter.
• Low: The screen gets darker.
: Off
▼
• Off: Switches off the DNIe mode.
• On: Switches on the DNIe mode.
►
►
: Off
▼
Move
➣ This function is active only when an external device is connected to the
TV via HDMI. “HDMI Black Level” function may not be compatible with
all external devices.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Enter
Return
Picture Options
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Normal
Film Mode
: OffLow
Blue Only Mode
: Off
Move
Enter
Return
English - 35
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 35
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:24
Setting the Film Mode
Picture Options
The TV can be set to automatically sense and process film signals from all
sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality.
1.Follow the “Activating Picture Options” instructions numbers 1 and 2.
(Refer to page 33)
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Film Mode”, then press the ENTER
button.
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
: Off
►
▼
Move
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “Auto1” or “Auto2”, then press the
ENTER
button.
• Off: Turn the Film Mode function off.
• Auto1: Automatically adjusts the picture for the best quality when
watching a film.
• Auto2: Automatically optimizes the video text when watching a film.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ “Film mode” is supported in TV, AV, S-Video, Component (480i / 1080i)
and HDMI (480i / 1080i).
Enter
Return
Picture Options
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Off
Film Mode
: OffAuto1
Blue Only Mode
: OffAuto2
Move
Enter
Return
Setting the Blue Only Mode
This function is for AV device measurement experts. This function displays the
blue signal only by removing the red and green signals from the video signal so
as to provide a Blue Filter effect that is used to adjust the Color and Tint of video
equipment such as DVD players, Home Theaters, etc.
Using this function, you can adjust the Color and Tint to preferred values
appropriate to the signal level of each video device using the Red/Green/Blue/
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Color Bar Patterns, without using an additional Blue Filter.
1.Follow the “Activating Picture Options” instructions numbers 1 and 2.
(Refer to page 33)
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Blue Only Mode”, then press the
ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off” or “On”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ “Blue Only Mode” is available when the picture mode is set to “Movie” or
“Standard”.
Picture Options
▲
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
: Off
►
Auto Motion Plus 120Hz : Medium
Move
Enter
Return
Picture Options
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
: OffOff
On
Auto Motion Plus 120Hz : Low
Move
Enter
Return
English - 36
BN68-01691A-Eng_1.indd 36
2008-08-06 �� 9:12:13
Setting the Auto Motion Plus 120Hz
Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clearer
picture.
1.Follow the “Activating Picture Options” instructions numbers 1 and 2.
(Refer to page 33)
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Motion Plus 120Hz”, then press the
ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “Low”, “Medium”, “High” or “Demo”,
then press the ENTER
button.
•
•
•
•
•
Off: Switches Auto Motion Plus 120Hz off.
Low: Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to minimum.
Medium: Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to medium.
High: Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to maximum.
Demo: Displays the difference between Auto Motion Plus 120Hz on and
off modes. The screen after applying “Auto Motion Plus 120Hz” appears
on the left.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ If you enable “Auto Motion Plus 120Hz”, noise may appear on the
screen. If this occurs, set “Auto Motion Plus 120Hz” to “Off”.
Picture Options
▲
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
DNle
: Off
HDMI Black Level
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
Blue Only Mode
: Off
Auto Motion Plus 120Hz : Medium
Move
Enter
►
Return
Picture Options
▲
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
: OffOff
DNle
HDMI Black Level
Low
: Normal
Film Mode
: OffMedium
Blue Only Mode
: OffHigh
Demo
Auto Motion Plus 120Hz : Medium
Move
Enter
Return
English - 37
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 37
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:25
Viewing Picture-in-Picture
You can use the PIP feature to simultaneously watch the TV tuner and one external video source. (See page 44 to select
the PIP picture sound.) This product has one built-in tuner, which does not allow PIP to function in the same mode. Please
see ‘PIP Settings’ below for details.
➣ While V-Chip (See page 62) is in operation, the PIP function cannot be used.
Activating Picture-in-Picture
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “PIP”, then press the ENTER
button.
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
2.Press the ENTER
button again.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “On”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ If you turn the TV off while watching in PIP mode and turn it on again, the
PIP window will disappear.
➣ You can view TV broadcasts on the PIP screen (sub-picture) when the
main picture is from an external device connected to HDMI 1,
HDMI/DVI 2, HDMI 3, HDMI 4, Component1, 2 or PC.
➣ PIP Settings
Main picture
Sub picture
Component 1, 2
HDMI 1, HDMI/DVI 2, HDMI 3, HDMI 4
PC
TV
PIP
PIP
: Off
Size
:
Position
:
Air/Cable
: Air
Channel
: Air 11
Off
On
Move
Changing the Size of the PIP Window
Enter
Return
Enter
Return
Enter
Return
PIP
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Size”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the required option, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly
unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke.
PIP
: On
Size
:
Position
:
Air/Cable
: Air
Channel
: Air 11
Move
Changing the Position of the PIP Window
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Position”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the required option, then press the ENTER
button.
) and Double Wide (
) modes, “Position”
➣ In Double Window (
cannot be selected.
PIP
PIP
: On
Size
:
Position
:
Air/Cable
: Air
Channel
: Air 11
Move
English - 38
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 38
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:25
Changing the PIP Channel
PIP
5.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Air/Cable”, then press the ENTER
button.
6.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Air” or “Cable”, then press the ENTER
button.
PIP
: On
Size
:
Position
:
Air/Cable
: AirAir
Channel
: AirCable
11
Move
7.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
8.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired channel in the PIP window.
Press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Enter
PIP
: On
Size
:
Position
:
Air/Cable
: Air
Channel
: AirAir
1111
Move
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “PIP”, then press the ENTER
3. Press the ◄ or ►button to select “On”.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a particular item.
5. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the required option.
6. Press the EXIT or TOOLS button to exit.
Return
PIP
Enter
Return
Tools
button.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Picture Size :
16:9
Picture Mode
:
Standard
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
PIP
Move
Enter
e Exit
PIP
PIP
◄
Off
Size
:
Posion
:
Air/Cable
:
Air
Channel
:
Air 11
Sound Select :
►
Main
Adjust
Return
English - 39
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 39
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:25
Sound Control
Changing the Sound Standard
Sound
You can select the sound mode to best suit the programming you’re watching.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound”, then press the ENTER
button.
Mode
: Custom
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround XT : Off
•
•
•
•
•
Sound
2.Press the ENTER
button to select “Mode”. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to
select “Standard”, “Music”, “Movie”, “Speech”, or “Custom” sound setting,
then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Preferred Language
: English
Multi-Track Sound
: Stereo
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Mode
: Custom
Standard
Equalizer
Music
SRS TruSurround XT : OffMovie
Preferred Language : English
Speech
Multi-Track Sound
: Stereo
Custom
Auto Volume
: Off
Standard: Selects the normal sound mode.
Music: Emphasizes music over voices.
Movie: Provides the best sound for movies
Speech: Emphasizes voice over other sounds.
Custom: Recalls your customized sound settings.
(see “Customizing the Sound”)
Select Speaker : TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Tools
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound Mode”.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the required option.
4. Press the EXIT or TOOLS button to exit.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Multi-Track Sound :
Stereo
Picture Size : 16:9
Picture Mode
:
Standard
Sound Mode
◄
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
►
Add to Favorite
Switch to Cable
Move
Adjust
e Exit
Customizing the Sound
Mode
Sound
The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preference.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Equalizer”, then press the ENTER
button.
: Custom
Equalizer SRS TruSurround XT : Off
Preferred Language
: English
Multi-Track Sound
: Stereo
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
3.Press the ENTER
button to select “Mode”.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Standard”, “Music”, “Movie”, “Speech”, or
“Custom” sound setting, then press the ENTER
button.
Equalizer
Mode
: Standard Standard
Balance
L
Music
R
100Hz
-
Movie
+
300Hz
-
Speech
+
1kHz
-
Custom
+
3kHz
-
+
10kHz
-
+
Move
Enter
Return
English - 40
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 40
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:26
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a particular frequency to adjust.
Press the ◄ or ► button to increase or decrease the level of the particular
frequency.
• Mode: Selects the sound mode among the predefined settings.
• Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker.
• Bandwidth Adjustment (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz):
To adjust the level of different bandwidth frequencies.
Equalizer
Mode
: Custom
Balance
L
R
100Hz
-
+
300Hz
-
+
1kHz
-
+
3kHz
-
+
10kHz
-
+
▼
Move
Enter
Return
Equalizer
Resetting the Equalizer Settings to the Factory Defaults
5.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Reset”, then press the ENTER
➣ The equalizer resets to the factory defaults.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Adjust
▲
button.
Balance
L
R
100Hz
-
+
300Hz
-
+
1kHz
-
+
3kHz
-
+
10kHz
-
+
Reset
Move
Enter
►
Return
Setting the TruSurround XT
Sound
TruSurround XT is a patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multichannel content over two
speakers. TruSurround delivers a compelling, virtual surround sound experience through any two-speaker playback system,
including internal television speakers. It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Mode
: Custom
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound”, then press the ENTER
button.
Equalizer 2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “SRS TruSurround XT”, then press the
SRS TruSurround XT : Off ENTER
button.
Preferred Language
: English
Multi-Track Sound
: Stereo
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
Mode
: Custom
Equalizer Sound
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off” or “On”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
SRS TruSurround XT : Off ►
Off
Preferred Language
: English
On
Multi-Track Sound
: Stereo
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
TruSurround XT, SRS and
Symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
TruSurround XT technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
English - 41
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 41
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:27
Choosing Preferred Language
The digital-TV transmission system is capable of simultaneous transmission of many audio tracks (for example,
simultaneous translations of the program into foreign languages).
Select the language you would like to hear the audio track in.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Equalizer
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound”, then press the ENTER
button.
SRS TruSurround XT : Off
Sound
Preferred Language: English
Multi-Track Sound
: Stereo
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround XT : Off
Sound
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Preferred Language”, then press the
ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to choose the language (English, Spanish or
French) you want, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Preferred Language: English
English
Multi-Track Sound
: Stereo
Spanish
Auto Volume
: OffFrench
Select Speaker
➣ “Preferred Language” is available only in Digital TV mode.
➣ You can only select the language from among the actual languages being
broadcast.
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
Choosing a Multi-Channel Sound (MTS) track
Sound
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Multi-Track Sound”, then press the
ENTER
button.
SRS TruSurround XT : Off
Preferred Language
: English
Multi-Track Sound : Stereo
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a setting you want, then press the
ENTER
button. Press the EXIT button to exit.
Sound
• Mono: Choose for channels that are broadcasting in mono or if you are
having difficulty receiving a stereo signal.
• Stereo: Choose for channels that are broadcasting in stereo.
• SAP: Choose to listen to the Separate Audio Program, which is usually
a foreign-language translation.
SRS TruSurround XT : Off
Preferred Language
: English
Multi-Track Sound : Stereo
Auto Volume
Mono
: OffStereo
Select Speaker
: TVSAP
Speaker
Sound Select
►
: Main
Sound Reset
➣ “Multi-Track Sound” is available only in Analog TV mode.
➣ Depending on the particular program being broadcast, you can listen to
“Mono”, “Stereo” or “SAP”.
Tools
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Multi-Track Sound”.
3. Press the ◄ or ►button to select the required option.
4. Press the EXIT or TOOLS button to exit.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Multi-Track Sound ◄
Stereo
►
Picture Size : 16:9
Picture Mode
:
Standard
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
Add to Favorite
Switch to Cable
Move
Adjust
e Exit
English - 42
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 42
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:27
Automatic Volume Control
Sound
Reduces the differences in volume level among broadcasters.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Volume”, then press the ENTER
button.
Preferred Language
: English
Multi-Track Sound
: Stereo
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
Sound
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to set “Off” or “On” then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Preferred Language
: English
Multi-Track Sound
: Stereo
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
: TVOn
Speaker
►
Sound Select
: Main
Off
Sound Reset
Selecting the Speaker
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Select Speaker”, then press the ENTER�
button.
Sound
When you watch TV by connecting it to a home theater, turn the TV speaker off so that the audio from the TV is output using
the external speakers instead of the TV speakers.
Multi-Track Sound : Stereo
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Auto Volume
: Off
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound”, then press the ENTER
button.
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
• External Speaker: Used to listen to the sound of the External Speaker.
• TV Speaker: Used to listen to the sound of the TV Speaker.
TV's Internal Speakers
Sound
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ When “Select Speaker” is set to “External Speaker”, you can operate only
“Preferred Language” (in digital TV mode), “Multi-Track Sound” (in analog
TV mode), “Sound Select” (in PIP mode) and “Sound Reset” in Sound
menu.
➣ The VOL –, VOL+ and MUTE buttons do not operate when the “Select
Speaker” is set to “External Speaker”.
Multi-Track Sound : Stereo
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
Sound Select
Sound Reset
: TV Speaker►
External Speaker
: Main
TV Speaker
Audio Out (Optical, L/R Out) to Sound System
RF
AV, S-Video
Component, PC, HDMI
RF
AV, S-Video
Component, PC, HDMI
TV Speaker
Speaker Output
Speaker Output
Speaker Output
Sound Output
Sound Output
Sound Output
External Speaker
Mute
Mute
Mute
Sound Output
Sound Output
Sound Output
Video No Signal
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
English - 43
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 43
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:28
Listening to the Sound of the Sub (PIP) Picture
Sound
When the PIP feature is activated, you can listen to the sound of the sub (PIP) picture.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound Select”, then press the ENTER
button.
• Main: Used to listen to the sound of the main picture.
• Sub: Used to listen to the sound of the sub picture.
: Off
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
Sound
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Main” or “Sub”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Auto Volume
Auto Volume
: Off
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Main
Sound Reset
►
Sub
➣ You can select this option when “PIP” is set to “On”. (See page 38)
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “PIP”.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “On”.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound Select”.
5. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the required option.
6. Press the EXIT or TOOLS button to exit.
PIP
PIP
:
Size
:
Posion
:
Air/Cable
:
Air
Channel
:
Air 11
Sound Select Move
On
◄ Main ►
Adjust
Return
English - 44
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 44
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:28
Resetting the Sound Settings to the Factory Defaults
Sound
You can restore the Sound settings to the factory defaults.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound Reset”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Reset All”, “Reset Sound Mode” or
“Cancel” then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Select Speaker
: TV Speaker
Sound Select
: Main
Sound Reset
• Reset All: All the sound values return to default settings.
• Reset Sound Mode: Current sound values return to default settings.
• Cancel: Select the sound reset options.
Sound Reset
Select the sound reset options.
Reset All
Reset Sound Mode
Move
Enter
Cancel
Return
Connecting Headphones (Sold separately)
You can connect a set of headphones to your set if you wish to watch a TV program without disturbing other people in the
room.
TV Side Panel
➣ When you insert the headphone’s plug into the headphone jack, you can
operate only “Preferred Language” (in digital TV mode), “Multi-Track Sound”
(in analog TV mode), “Auto Volume”, “Sound Select” (in PIP mode) and “Sound
Reset” in Sound menu.
➣ Prolonged use of headphones at a high volume may damage your hearing.
➣ You will not hear sound from the speakers when you connect headphones to
the TV.
➣ The headphone volume and TV volume are adjusted separately.
15
English - 45
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 45
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:29
Channel Control
Managing Channels
Using this menu, you can Add/Delete or set Favorite channels and use the program guide for digital broadcasts.
Viewing All Channels
Auto Program
Clear Scrambled Channel
Channel
Show all currently available channels.
To use the Channel List function, first run “Auto Program” (see page 21).
1.Press the MENU button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel List”, then press the ENTER
button.
Channel List
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
2. Press the ◄ button to select “Added Channels”.
Added Channels
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
♥ TV #8TV
VCR
DVD
STB
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 8
Air
13
Air
13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air  Antenna
All Channels
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “All Channels”.
➣ Shows all currently available channels.
Press the ENTER
button.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a channel to view, then press the
ENTER
button. You can watch the selected channel.
 Zoom
2
Air
4
Air
4-2  Select
Option
♥ TV #8
8
Air
13
Air
13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air  Antenna
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
 Zoom
 Select
Option
O Press the CH LIST button on the remote control to bring up the channel lists.
Using the Color buttons on the Remote with the Channel List
•
•
•
•
Red (Antenna): Switches to Air or Cable.
Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number.
Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists.
TOOLS (Option): Displays the “Add” (or “Delete”), “Add to Favorite”(or
“Delete from Favorite”), “Timer Viewing”, “Channel Name Edit”, “Select All”,
“Deselect All” and “Auto Program” menus. (The Options menus may differ
depending on the situation.)
➣ A gray-colored channel indicates the channel has been deleted.
The “Add” menu only appears for deleted channels.
➣ A channel marked with the “♥” mark means the channel has been set as a Favorite.
The “Delete from Favorite” menu only appears for channels with the “♥” mark.
SET
RESET
SET
RESET
English - 46
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 46
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:29
Erasing and Adding Channels
Clear Scrambled Channel
Channel List
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
Added Channels
2. Press the ◄ button to select “Added Channels”.
Auto Program
Channel
You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want.
1.Press the MENU button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel List”, then press the
ENTER
button.
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 ♥ TV #8
8
Air
13
Air
13-1 ♥ TV #3
 Zoom
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 TV
VCR
DVD
STB
♥ TV #8
8
Air
13
Air
Air  Antenna
Option
 Select
13-1 ♥ TV #3
All Channels
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a channel to delete, then press the
TOOLS button.
5.Press the ENTER
button to select “Delete”.
➣ All deleted channels will be shown on “All Channels” menu.
6. Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ You can also delete a channel to the “Added Channels” menu in the same
manner.
➣ A channel must be deleted before it can be added back to the “Added
Channels” list.
➣ To Add (Restore) a channel back to the All Channel List, follow steps
1-3 above, press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a channel to add, the press
the TOOLS button. Press the ENTER
button to select Add.
Air  Antenna
All Channels
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “All Channels”.
➣ Shows all currently available channels.
Press the ENTER
button.
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
 Zoom
2
Air
4
Air
Option
 Select
Delete
♥ TV #8
Add to Favorite
8
Air
Timer Viewing
13
Air
4-2 Channel Name Edit
13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air  Antenna
Select All
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
 Zoom
Auto Program
 Select
Option
O Press the CH LIST button on the remote control to bring up the channel
lists.
SET
RESET
English - 47
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 47
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:30
Setting Your Favorite Channels
Channel List
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 ♥ TV #8
8
Air
13
Air
TV
13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air  Antenna
All Channels
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 DVD
STB
Option
 Select
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
♥ TV #8
8
Air
13
Air
Air  Antenna
VCR
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
 Zoom
13-1 ♥ TV #3
All Channels
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “All Channels”.
➣ Shows all currently available channels.
Press the ENTER
button.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a channel as a favorite channel.
➣ Adding multiple channels to Favorites
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired channel in the channel
list. Then press the yellow button. Repeat the above operation to select
multiple channels. The mark appears to the left of the selected
channels.
5. Press the TOOLS button.
6.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Add to Favorite”, then press the
ENTER
button. The “♥” symbol will be displayed and the channel will be
set as a favorite.
7.To cancel your favorite channel selection, press the TOOLS button when a
favorite channel is selected.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Delete from Favorite”, then press the
ENTER
button.
The channel is deleted from “Favorites” and the “♥” mark also disappears.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ You can also Add or Delete a channel from Favorites in the “Added
Channels” menu in the same manner.
➣ All favorite channels will be shown in the “Favorite” menu.
Clear Scrambled Channel
Added Channels
2. Press the ◄ button to select “Added Channels”.
Auto Program
Channel
You can set channels you watch frequently as favorites.
1.Press the MENU button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel List”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
 Zoom
2
Air
4
Air
Option
 Select
Delete
♥ TV #8
Add to Favorite
8
Air
Timer Viewing
13
Air
4-2 Channel Name Edit
13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air  Antenna
Select Allin Wonderland
Alice’s Adventures
Auto Program
 Zoom
 Select
Option
O Press the CH LIST button on the remote control to bring up the channel
lists.
O To select the favorite channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button
on the remote control.
Tools
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Add to Favorite” (or “Delete from
Favorite”), then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The current channel is added to (or deleted from) Favorites.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Multi-Track Sound :
Stereo
Picture Size : Picture Mode
:
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
SET
16:9
Standard
RESET
Add to Favorite
Switch to Cable
Move
English - 48
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 48
Enter
SET
e Exit
RESET
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:30
Reserving a Program (Timer Viewing)
Channel
If you reserve a program you want to watch, the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel
List; even when you are watching another channel.
To reserve a program, set the current time first. See pages 58~59. Reserved channels can only be set if they are in the
“Channel List” (See page 50).
1.Press the MENU button.
Auto Program
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
Clear Scrambled Channel
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel List”, then press the ENTER
Channel List
button.
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a channel, then press the TOOLS button.
Added Channels
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Timer Viewing”, then press the ENTER
button. The Reserve a Program (Timer Viewing) screen appears.
4.Press the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to reserve a program and then press the
ENTER
button. Reserving a program has been completed.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ You can also reserve a program in the “All Channels” or “Favorite” menus using
the same procedures.
➣ For information on how to confirm a viewing reservation, refer to page 50.
Only memorized channels can be reserved.
➣ You can set the channel, month, day, year, hour and minute directly by pressing
the number buttons on the remote control.
2
Air
4
Air
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Delete
♥ TV #8
Add to Favorite
8
Air
Timer Viewing
13
Air
4-2 Channel Name Edit
Select Allin Wonderland
Alice’s Adventures
13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air  Antenna
Auto Program
 Zoom
Option
 Select
Timer Viewing
Antenna
Air
Repeat
Once
Channel
4
Date
01 - 01 - 2008
Start Time
10:09 am
Adjust
Move
Enter
Return
O Press the CH LIST button on the remote control to bring up the channel lists.
Added Channels
Digital Program Guide and Viewing Reservation
When a digital channel is selected, and you press the ► button, the Program Guide
for the channel appears. You can reserve a program according to the procedures
described above.
: A program currently being broadcast.
: A reserved program
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 ♥ TV #8
1/1/2008
12:59 pm M.Spillane’s mike Ha...
8
Air
1:59 pm Quincy, M.E
13
Air
3:21 pm The Equalizer
13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air
 Zoom
Option
SET
Watch
RESET
English - 49
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 49
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:31
Confirming a Viewing Reservation
Clear Scrambled Channel
Channel List
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
Added Channels
2.Press the ◄ button to select “Added Channels”.
Auto Program
Channel
You can view, modify or delete a reservation.
1.Press the MENU button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel List”, then press the
ENTER
button.
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 ♥ TV #8
8
Air
13
Air
13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air  Antenna
Programmed
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Programmed”.
➣ Shows all current reserved programs.
Press the ENTER
button.
Programmed
Canceling a reservation
4.To select a reservation item to be canceled, press the ▲ or ▼ button, and
then press the TOOLS button.
5.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Cancel schedules”, then press the
ENTER
button.
6.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “OK”, then press the ENTER
button.
The viewing reservation has been canceled.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
 Select
Option
1/1/2008
1:59 pm 13-1 TV #3 Quincy, M.E
2:59 pm 13-1 TV #3
The Equalizer
3:59 pm 13-1 TV #3
McMillan & Wife
5:59 pm 13-1 TV #3
M.Spillane’s mike Hammer
Air  Antenna
Modifying a viewing reservation
4.To select a reservation item to be modified, press the ▲ or ▼ button and
then press the TOOLS button.
5.Press the ENTER
button to select “Change Info”.
6.Press the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to change a reservation setting and then
press the ENTER
button. The reservation modification is applied.
 Zoom
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
 Zoom
 Select
Information
Option
1/1/2008
1:59 pm 13-1 TV #3 Quincy,
M.EInfo
Change
2:59 pm 13-1 TV #3
3:59 pm 13-1 TV #3
Cancel
schedules
The
Equalizer
Information
McMillan
& Wife
Select All
DVD STB
5:59 pm 13-1 TV
TV #3VCRM.Spillane’s
mike Hammer
Air  Antenna
 Zoom
 Select
Option
Information
Programmed Option
•
•
•
•
Change Info: Select to change a viewing reservation.
Cancel schedules: Select to cancel a viewing reservation.
Information: Select to view a viewing reservation.
Select All: Select all reserved programs.
O Press the CH LIST button on the remote control to bring up the channel
lists.
English - 50
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 50
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:32
Labeling Channels - Analog
Channels can labeled so that their call letters appear whenever the channel is selected.
1.Press the MENU button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel List”, then press the ENTER
button.
Auto Program
Clear Scrambled Channel
Channel
Channel List
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
Added Channels
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the channel to be assigned a new name,
then press the TOOLS button.
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 ♥ TV #8
8
Air
13
Air
13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air  Antenna
Added Channels
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel Name Edit”, then press the
ENTER
button.
 Zoom
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 Air
13
Air
13-1 ♥ TV #3
4.Press the ▲/▼/◄/► button to select a letter, then press the ENTER
button.
•
•
•
•
•
Numeric buttons: You can enter numbers.
Red button: You can switch between English and Characters.
Green button: You can delete an already entered character.
Yellow button: You can enter a blank space.
Blue button: Press this button to finish renaming a channel.
 Zoom
Option
 Select
Delete
Add to Favorite
♥ TV #8
8
Air  Antenna
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
Timer Viewing
Channel Name Edit
Select All
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
Auto Program
 Select
Option
Channel Name Edit
_
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
0~9
Number
Character
Delete
Blank
Done
Move
Enter
Return
5.When you have finished, press the blue button to assign the new name.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned
and cannot be labelled.
English - 51
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 51
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:32
Selecting and Deselecting All Channels
Added Channels
1.Press the MENU button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel List”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a channel, then press the TOOLS button.
2
Air
4
Air
4-2 ♥ TV #8
8
Air
13
Air
13-1 ♥ TV #3
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Select All” or “Deselect All”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ You can select(or Deselect) all channel in the channel list.
➣ The mark appears to the left of the selected channels.
Air  Antenna
 Zoom
Delete
Add to Favorite
Delete from Favorite
Deselect All
Select All
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
Auto Program
Option
 Select
Storing Channels in Memory (Auto Program)
Added Channels
1.Press the MENU button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel List”, then press the
ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a channel, then press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Program”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ For further details on setting up options, refer to page 21.
2
Air
4
Air
Delete
♥ TV #8
Add to Favorite
8
Air
Timer Viewing
13
Air
4-2 13-1 ♥ TV #3
Air  Antenna
 Zoom
Channel Name Edit
Select All
Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland
Auto Program
 Select
Option
English - 52
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 52
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:33
Clearing Scrambled Channels - Digital
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Clear Scrambled Channel”, then press the
ENTER
button. It searches scrambled channels, which are to be removed
from the list.
➣ To stop searching scrambled channels;
Press the ENTER
button to select “Stop”.
Press the ◄ button to select “Yes”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.When the scrambled channel searching is completed, press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ This function is only available in “Cable” mode.
Channel
The “Clear Scrambled Channel” function is used to filter out scrambled channels after “Auto Program” is completed.
This process may take up to 20~30 minutes.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Antenna
: Cable
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
Auto Program
button.
Clear Scrambled Channel
Channel List
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
Clear Scrambled Channel
Removing scrambled channel.
DTV Cable 10
3%
Stop
Enter
Return
Fine Tuning Analog Channels
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the fine tuning.
To store the fine tuning setting in the TV’s memory, press the ENTER
button.
➣ If you do not store the fine-tuned channel in memory, adjustments are not
saved.
4.To reset the fine tuning setting, press the ▼ button to select “Reset”, then
press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ "*” will appear next to the name of fine-tuned channels.
➣ Only analog TV channels can be fine tuned.
Clear Scrambled Channel
Channel List
Channel
Use fine tuning to manually adjust a particular channel for optimal reception.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Fine Tune”, then press the ENTER
button.
Fine Tune
Signal Strength
Fine Tune
Air 6
0
Reset
Move
Adjust
Save
Return
Fine Tune
Air 6*
Fine Tuned
+3
Reset
Move
Adjust
Save
Return
Fine Tune
Air 6
0
Reset
Move
Enter
Return
English - 53
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 53
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:33
Checking the Digital-Signal Strength
Channel
Unlike analog channels, which can vary in reception quality from “snowy” to clear, digital (HDTV) channels have either
perfect reception quality or you will not receive them at all. So, unlike analog channels, you cannot fine tune a digital
channel. You can, however, adjust your antenna to improve the reception of available digital channels.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to
Channel List
select “Channel”, then press the ENTER
button.
Fine Tune
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Signal Strength”, then press the
Signal Strength
ENTER
button.
If the signal strength meter indicates that the signal is weak, physically adjust
your antenna to increase the signal strength.
Continue to adjust the antenna until you find the best position with the
strongest signal.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Signal Strength
OK
Enter
Return
English - 54
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 54
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:33
PC Display
Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display
Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)
The Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. The actual screens on your PC will probably be
different, depending upon your particular version of Windows and your particular video card. However, even if your actual
screens look different, the same basic set-up information will apply in almost all cases. (If not, contact your computer
manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.)
1. First, click on “Control Panel” on the Windows start menu.
2.When the control panel window appears, click on “Appearance and Themes” and
a display dialog-box will appear.
3.When the control panel window appears, click on “Display” and a display dialogbox will appear.
4. Navigate to the “Settings” tab on the display dialog-box.
The correct size setting (resolution)
Optimum: 1920 X 1080 pixels
If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the
correct value is “60” or “60 Hz”. Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit the dialog box.
Display Modes
If the signal from the system equals the standard signal mode, the screen is adjusted automatically. If the signal from the
system doesn’t equal the standard signal mode, adjust the mode by referring to your videocard user guide; otherwise there
may be no video. For the display modes listed below, the screen image has been optimized during manufacturing.
D-Sub Input
Mode
IBM
VESA
CVT
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
Pixel Clock
Frequency (MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H/V)
640 x 350
720 x 400
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
1360 x 768
1600 x 1200
1920 x 1080RB
31.469
31.469
31.469
37.861
37.500
37.879
48.077
46.875
48.363
56.476
60.023
63.981
79.976
47.712
75.000
66.587
70.086
70.087
59.940
72.809
75.000
60.317
72.188
75.000
60.004
70.069
75.029
60.020
75.025
60.015
60.000
59.934
25.175
28.322
25.175
31.500
31.500
40.000
50.000
49.500
65.000
75.000
78.750
108.000
135.000
85.500
162.000
138.500
+/-/+
-/-/-/+/+
+/+
+/+
-/-/+/+
+/+
+/+
+/+
+/+
+/-
Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
31.469
37.879
48.363
63.981
47.712
75.000
67.500
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
59.940
60.317
60.004
60.020
60.015
60.000
60.000
Pixel Clock
Frequency (MHz)
25.175
40.000
65.000
108.000
85.500
162.000
148.500
Sync Polarity
(H/V)
-/+/+
-/+/+
+/+
+/+
+/+
HDMI/DVI Input
Mode
VESA
CEA
Resolution
640 x 480
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024
1360 x 768
1600 x 1200
1920 x 1080p
English - 55
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 55
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:34
Setting up the TV with your PC
How to Auto Adjust
Use the Auto “Adjust function” to have the TV set automatically adjust the video
signals it receives. The function also automatically fine-tunes the settings and
adjusts the frequency values and positions.
➣ This function does not work in DVI-Digital mode.
➣ Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture”, then press the ENTER
button.
Source List
TV PC
----
AV1 ----
AV2 ----
S-Video
----
Component1
----
Component2
---Option
Refresh
Picture
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Adjustment”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Brightness
: 45
Sharpness
:0
Auto Adjustment
Screen
Detailed Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Auto Adjustment in progress. Please Wait.
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Adjustment”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Tools
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Picture Size : 16:9
Picture Mode
:
Standard
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
PIP
Auto Adjustment
Move
Adjusting the Screen Quality
Enter
Sharpness
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Coarse” or “Fine”, then press the
ENTER
button. Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the screen quality.
➣ Vertical stripes may appear or the picture may be blurry.
Press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
:0
Auto Adjustment
Picture
The purpose of the picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise.
If the noise is not removed by fine tuning alone, then make the vertical frequency
adjustments on your PC and fine tune again. After the noise has been reduced,
re-adjust the picture so that it is aligned on the center of the screen.
➣ Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Screen”, then press the ENTER
button.
e Exit
Screen
Detailed Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Screen
Coarse
50
Fine
24
PC Position
Image Reset
Move
Enter
Coarse
Return
50
Move
Adjust
Enter
Return
English - 56
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 56
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:35
Changing the Screen Position
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Screen”, then press the ENTER
button.
Sharpness
Picture
Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen.
➣ Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode.
1. Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture”, then press the ENTER
button.
:0
Auto Adjustment
Screen
Detailed Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Screen
Coarse
52
Fine
24
PC Position
►
Image Reset
Move
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “PC Position”, then press the ENTER
button.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjust the V-Position.
Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the H-Position.
Press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Enter
Return
PC Position
Adjust
Enter
Return
Initializing the Screen Position, Coarse and Fine
Sharpness
Picture
You can replace all image settings with the factory default values.
➣ Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode.
1. Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture”, then press the ENTER
button.
:0
Auto Adjustment
Screen
Detailed Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Screen”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Image Reset”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Screen
Coarse
52
Fine
24
PC Position
Image Reset
Move
Enter
►
Return
Image Reset is completed.
English - 57
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 57
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:35
Time Setting
Setting the Clock
Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the TV.
Also, you can check the time while watching the TV. (Just press the INFO button.)
Option 1: Setting the Clock Manually
button.
button.
Plug & Play
Language
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Time”, then press the ENTER
: English
Time
Network selection
: Cable
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
2. Press the ENTER
: Off
Time
button to select “Clock”.
Clock
: -- : -- --
Sleep Timer
: Off
Timer 1
: Inactivated
Timer 2
: Inactivated
Timer 3
: Inactivated
Move
3.Press the ENTER
button to select “Clock Mode”.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Manual”, then press the ENTER
button.
Enter
►
Return
Clock
Clock Mode
: Auto
Auto
Clock Set
Manual
Time Zone
DST
: Off
Move
Enter
Return
Clock Set
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Clock Set”, then press the ENTER
button.
Month
--
Day
--
Year
----
Hour
--
Minute
--
am/pm
--
Move
5.Press the ◄ or ► button to move to “Month”, “Day”, “Year”, “Hour”, “Minute”,
or “am/pm”. Set the date and time you want by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button,
then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button.
➣ You can set the month, day, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the
number buttons on the remote control.
Adjust
Enter
Return
Clock Set
Month
01
Day
01
Year
2008
Hour
12
Minute
00
am/pm
am
Move
Adjust
Enter
Return
English - 58
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 58
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:35
Option 2: Setting the Clock Automatically
Plug & Play
button.
button.
Language
Setup
The Clock can be set automatically if you are receiving a digital signal.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Time”, then press the ENTER
: English
Time
Network selection
: Cable
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
2. Press the ENTER
: Off
Time
button to select “Clock”.
Clock
: -- : -- --
Sleep Timer
: Off
Timer 1
: Inactivated
Timer 2
: Inactivated
Timer 3
: Inactivated
Move
3.Press the ENTER
button to select “Clock Mode”.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto”, then press the ENTER
button.
Enter
►
Return
Clock
Clock Mode
: Auto
Clock Set
Time Zone
DST
►
: Off
Move
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Time Zone”, then press the ENTER
button.
Enter
Return
Time Zone
Newfoundland
Atlantic
5.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to highlight the time zone for your local area, then
press the ENTER
button.
Eastern
Central
Mountain
Pacific

Move
6.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “DST” (Daylight Saving Time), then press
the ENTER
button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “On” or
“Auto”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time may not be
set correctly. If this occurs, set the time manually.
➣ The Antenna or cable must be connected in order to set the time
automatically.
Enter
Return
Clock
Clock Mode
: Auto
Off
Clock Set
On
Time Zone
Auto
: Off
DST
Move
Enter
Return
English - 59
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 59
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:36
Setting the Sleep Timer
Setup
The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes).
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Plug & Play
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
Language
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Time”, then press the ENTER
button.
: English
Time
Network selection
: Cable
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sleep Timer”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the minute, then press the ENTER
button.
To cancel the set sleep timer:
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, then press the ENTER
button.
: Off
Time
Clock
: -- : -- --
Sleep Timer
: OffOff
Timer 1
30 min.
: Inactivated
Timer 2
: Inactivated
60 min.
Timer 3
: Inactivated
90 min.
120 min.
150 min.
▼
4. Press the EXIT button to exit.
Move
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sleep Timer”.
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the minute.
4.Press the EXIT or TOOLS button to exit.
Enter
Return
Tools
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Multi-Track Sound :
Stereo
Picture Size : 16:9
Picture Mode
:
Standard
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer ◄
Off
►
Add to Favorite
Switch to Cable
Move
Adjust
e Exit
English - 60
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 60
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:36
Setting the On/Off Timer
Plug & Play
button.
Language
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Time”, then press the ENTER
: English
Time
Network selection
: Cable
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
2.Three different On/Off Timer Settings can be made.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Timer 1”, “Timer 2” or “Timer 3”, then
press the ENTER
button.
: Off
Time
Clock
: 12 : 00 am
Sleep Timer
: Off
Timer 1
: Inactivated
Timer 2
: Inactivated
Timer 3
: Inactivated
Move
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired item below.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjust the setting.
• On Time: Set the Hour, Minute, am/pm, and Activation/Inactivation.
(To activate timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to “Activate”.)
• Off Time: Set the Hour, Minute, am/pm, and Activation/Inactivation.
(To activate timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to “Activate”.)
• Volume: Set the desired volume level.
• Contents: When the “On Time” is active, you can turn on a specific
channel or play back contents such as photo or audio files.
– TV/USB: Select TV or USB. (Make sure that an USB device is
connected to your TV.)
– Antenna: Select “Air” or “Cable”.
– Channel: Select the desired channel.
– Music: Select the folder containing MP3 files on the USB device.
– Photo: Select the folder containing JPEG files on the USB device.
• Repeat: Select “Once”, “Everyday”, “Mon~Fri”, “Mon~Sat”, “Sat~Sun”,
or “Manual”.
➣ When “Manual” is selected, press the ► button to select the
desired day of the week. Press the ENTER
button over the
desired day and the mark will appear.
►
Enter
Return
Timer 1
On Time
12
Off Time
12
Volume
10
00
am
Inactivate
00
am
Inactivate
Contents
TV Cable
Repeat
Once
3
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri
Move
Adjust
Enter
Sat
Return
Contents
TV/USB
TV
Antenna
Cable
Channel
Channel
3am
Music
None
Photo
None
Move
Adjust
Enter
Return
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ You can set the hour, minute and channel by pressing the number
buttons on the remote control.
➣ Auto Power Off
When you set the timer On, the television will eventually turn off, if no
controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was turned on by the
timer. This function is only available in timer On mode and prevents
overheating, which may occur if a TV is on for too long time.
➣ When executing automatic power- on with scheduling a time and 2 USB
devices that have same manufacturer and folder name one another are
simultaneously connected, Other USB device can be read.
English - 61
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 61
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:36
Function Description
Selecting a Menu Language
Plug & Play
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Language”, then press the ENTER
button.
Language
: English
Time
Network selection
: Cable
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Plug & Play
Setup
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “English”, “Español” or “Français”.
Press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Language
: English
English
Español
Time
Network selection
: Cable
Français
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Using the V-Chip
The V-Chip feature automatically locks out programs that are deemed inappropriate for children. The user must enter a PIN
(personal ID number) before any of the V-Chip restrictions are set up or changed.
➣ “V-Chip” function is not available in HDMI, Component or PC mode.
Setting Up Your Personal ID Number (PIN)
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “V-Chip”, then press the ENTER
button.
The message “Enter PIN” will appear. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
➣ The default PIN number of a new TV set is “0-0-0-0”.
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
V-Chip
Enter PIN
*
*
*
0~9 Enter PIN
Return
English - 62
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 62
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:37
3.The “V-Chip” screen will appear.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Change PIN”, then press the ENTER
button. The Change PIN screen will appear. Choose any 4 digits for your
PIN and enter them. As soon as the 4 digits are entered, the “Confirm New
PIN” screen appears. Re-enter the same 4 digits. When the Confirm screen
disappears, your PIN has been memorized.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ If you forget the PIN, press the remote-control buttons in the following
sequence, which resets the pin to 0-0-0-0 : Power Off. → Mute → 8 → 2
→ 4 → Power On.
V-Chip
V-Chip Lock
: Off
TV Parental Guidelines
MPAA Rating
Canadian English
Canadian French Downloadable U.S. Rating
Change PIN
►
Move
Enter
Return
Change PIN
Enter New PIN
Confirm New PIN
0~9 Enter PIN
Return
How to Enable/Disable the V-Chip
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “V-Chip”, then press the ENTER
button.
The message “Enter PIN” will appear. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
V-Chip
Enter PIN
*
3.The “V-Chip” screen will appear.
To enable the V-Chip feature, press the ENTER
button so that the “V-Chip
Lock” field is “On”. (Pressing the ▲ or ▼ button will alternate between “On”
and “Off”.)
Press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
*
*
0~9 Enter PIN
Return
V-Chip
V-Chip Lock
: Off
►
TV Parental Guidelines
MPAA Rating
Canadian English
Canadian French Downloadable U.S. Rating
Change PIN
Move
Enter
Return
Enter
Return
V-Chip
V-Chip Lock
TV Parental Guidelines
: Off
Off
MPAA Rating
On
Canadian English
Canadian French Downloadable U.S. Rating
Change PIN
Move
English - 63
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 63
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:37
How to Set up Restrictions Using the TV Parental Guidelines
Setup
First, set up a personal identification number (PIN) and enable the V-Chip. (See previous section.) Parental restrictions can
be set up using either of two methods: The TV guidelines or the MPAA rating.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Cable Network Setup
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
Wireless Network Setup
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “V-Chip”, then press the ENTER
V-Chip
button. The message “Enter PIN” will appear. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
Caption
3.The “V-Chip” screen will appear. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “TV
External Settings
Parental Guidelines”, then press the ENTER
button.
Entertainment
: Off
4.The “TV Parental Guidelines” screen will appear.
Energy Saving
: Off
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the six aged based categories:
PIP
• TV-Y: Young children
• TV-Y7: Children 7 and over
• TV-G: General audience
5. At this point, one of the TV-Ratings is selected.
Press the ENTER
button. Depending on your existing setup, the “ ”
symbol will be selected. (Blank = Unblocked,
= Blocked)
While “ ” is selected, press the ENTER
button to block or unblock the
category. To select a different TV-Rating, press the ▲ or ▼ button and then
repeat the process.
➣ Allow all: Press to unlock all TV ratings.
Block all: Press to lock all TV ratings.
➣ The TV-Y, TV-Y7, TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 and TV-MA have additional
options. See the next step to change any of the following sub-ratings:
ALL / FV / V / S / L / D
➣ The V-Chip will automatically block certain categories that are “more
restrictive”. For example, if you block “TV-Y” category, then TV-Y7 will
automatically be blocked. Similarly, if you block the TV-G category,
then all the categories in the “young adult” group will be blocked (TV-G,
TV-PG, TV-14 and TV-MA). The sub-ratings (D, L, S, V) work together
similarly. (See next section.)
6.How to set the FV, D, L, S and V sub-ratings.
First, select one of these TV-Ratings: TV-Y, TV-Y7, TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 or
TV-MA (See Step 4) and press the ► button.
The “ ” symbol will be displayed for each sub-rating. While “ ” is
selected, press the ENTER
button to go to a sub rating. Press ENTER
to block the sub rating. To select a different TV-Rating, press the ▲ or ▼
button and then repeat the process.
• ALL: Lock all TV ratings.
• FV: Fantasy violence
• V: Violence
Software Upgrade
• TV-PG: Parental guidance
• TV-14: Viewers 14 and over
• TV-MA: Mature audience
• S: Sexual situation
• L: Adult Language
• D: Sexually Suggestive Dialog
➣ The V-chip will automatically block certain categories that are “More
restrictive”. For example, if you block “L” sub-rating in TV-PG, then the “L”
sub-ratings in TV-14 and TV-MA will automatically be blocked.
7.Press the EXIT button to clear all the screens. (Or proceed to the next
section, and set up additional restrictions based on the MPAA codes.)
➣ These categories consist of two separate groups: TV-Y and TV-Y7 (young
children through age 7) and TV-G through TV-MA (everybody else).
The restrictions for these two groups work independently: If a household
includes very young children as well as young adults, the TV guidelines
must be set up separately for each age group. (See next step.)
V-Chip
Enter PIN
*
*
*
0~9 Enter PIN
Return
V-Chip
V-Chip Lock
: On
TV Parental Guidelines
►
MPAA Rating
Canadian English
Canadian French Downloadable U.S. Rating
Change PIN
Move
Enter
Return
TV Parental Guidelines
ALL FV
V
S
L
D
TV-Y
Allow All
Block All
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Move
Enter
Return
TV Parental Guidelines
ALL FV
V
S
L
D
TV-Y
Allow All
Block All
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Move
Enter
Return
English - 64
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 64
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:38
How to Set up Restrictions Using the MPAA Ratings: G, PG, PG-13, R, NC-17, X, NR
Setup
The MPAA rating system uses the Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA) system and its main application is for
movies. When the V-Chip lock is on, the TV will automatically block any programs that are coded with objectionable ratings
(either MPAA or TV-Ratings).
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Cable Network Setup
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “V-Chip”, then press the ENTER
button.
The message “Enter PIN” will appear. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
V-Chip
Enter PIN
*
*
*
0~9 Enter PIN
3.The “V-Chip” screen will appear. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “MPAA
Rating”, then press the ENTER
button.
Return
V-Chip
V-Chip Lock
: On
TV Parental Guidelines
MPAA Rating
►
Canadian English
Canadian French Downloadable U.S. Rating
Change PIN
4.The “MPAA Rating” screen will appear. Repeatedly press the ▲ or ▼ button
to select a particular MPAA category. Pressing the ▲ or ▼ button will cycle
through the MPAA categories:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
G: General audience (no restrictions).
PG: Parental guidance suggested.
PG-13: Parents strongly cautioned.
R: Restricted. Children under 17 should be accompanied by an adult.
NC-17: No children under age 17.
X: Adults only.
NR: Not rated.
➣ Allow all: Press to unlock all TV ratings.
Block all: Press to lock all TV ratings.
➣ While a particular category is selected, press the ENTER
button to
activate it. The “ ” symbol will be displayed. Press the ENTER
button to block or unblock the category.
➣ The V-Chip will automatically block any category that is “More restrictive”.
For example, if you block the “PG-13” category, then “R”, “NC-17” and “X”
will automatically be blocked also.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Move
Enter
Return
MPAA Rating
G
Allow All
PG
Block All
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
NR
Move
Enter
Return
MPAA Rating
G
Allow All
PG
Block All
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
NR
Move
Enter
Return
English - 65
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 65
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:39
How to Set up Restrictions Using the Canadian English
Cable Network Setup
button.
Wireless Network Setup
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
V-Chip
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “V-Chip”, then press the ENTER
button.
The message “Enter PIN” will appear. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
Enter PIN
*
*
*
0~9 Enter PIN
Return
V-Chip
3.The “V-Chip” screen will appear. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select
“Canadian English”, then press the ENTER
button.
V-Chip Lock
: On
TV Parental Guidelines
MPAA Rating
Canadian English
Canadian French ►
Downloadable U.S. Rating
Change PIN
Move
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a appropriate restriction.
Press the ENTER
button to activate the restriction selected. The “
symbol is indicated.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ Allow all: Press to unlock all TV ratings.
Block all: Press to lock all TV ratings.
➣ The V-Chip will automatically block any category that is “More restrictive”.
For example, if you block G category, then PG, 14+ and 18+ will
automatically be blocked also.
Return
Canadian English
”
• C: Programming intended for children under age 8.
• C8+: Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8
years and over to watch on their own.
• G: General programming, suitable for all audiences.
• PG: Parental Guidance.
• 14+: Programming contains themes or content which may not be
suitable for viewers under the age of 14.
• 18+: Adult programming.
Enter
C
Allow All
C8+
Block All
G
PG
14+
18+
Move
Enter
Return
Canadian English
C
Allow All
C8+
Block All
G
PG
14+
18+
Move
Enter
Return
English - 66
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 66
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:39
How to Set up Restrictions Using the Canadian French
button.
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “V-Chip”, then press the ENTER
button.
The message “Enter PIN” will appear. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
V-Chip
Enter PIN
*
*
*
0~9 Enter PIN
3.The “V-Chip” screen will appear. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select
“Canadian French”, then press the ENTER
button.
Return
V-Chip
V-Chip Lock
: On
TV Parental Guidelines
MPAA Rating
Canadian English
Canadian French ►
Downloadable U.S. Rating
Change PIN
Move
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select an appropriate restriction. Press the
ENTER
button to activate the restriction selected. The “ ” symbol is
indicated.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ Allow all: Press to unlock all TV ratings.
Block all: Press to lock all TV ratings.
• G: General
• 8 ans+: Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8
years and over to watch on their own.
• 13 ans+: Programming may not be suitable for children under the age
of 13.
• 16 ans+: Programming is not suitable for children under the age of 16.
• 18 ans+: Programming restricted to adults.
➣ The V-Chip will automatically block any category that is “More restrictive”.
For example, if you block 8 ans+ category, then 13 ans+, 16 ans+ and 18
ans+ will automatically be blocked also.
Enter
Return
Canadian French
G
Allow All
8 ans+
Block All
13 ans+
16 ans+
18 ans+
Move
Enter
Return
Canadian French
G
Allow All
8 ans+
Block All
13 ans+
16 ans+
18 ans+
Move
Enter
Return
English - 67
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 67
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:40
Using the V-Chip for Digital channels
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
Setup
Parental restriction information can be used while watching DTV channels.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “V-Chip”, then press the ENTER
button.
The message “Enter PIN” will appear. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
V-Chip
Enter PIN
3.The “V-Chip” screen will appear. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select
“Downloadable U.S. Rating”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ If information is not downloaded from the broadcasting station, the
Downloadable U.S. rating menu is deactivated.
➣ Parental restriction information is automatically downloaded while
watching DTV channels. It may take several seconds.
➣ The Downloadable U.S. rating menu is available for use after information
is downloaded from the broadcasting station. However, depending on the
information from the broadcasting station, it may not be available for use.
*
*
*
Return
0~9 Enter PIN
V-Chip
V-Chip Lock
: On
TV Parental Guidelines
MPAA Rating
Canadian English
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a appropriate restriction. Press the ENTER
button to activate the restriction selected. The “ ” symbol is indicated.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ Allow all: Press to unlock all TV ratings.
Block all: Press to lock all TV ratings.
➣ Parental restriction levels differ depending on the broadcasting station.
➣ The default menu name and Downloadable US rating changes depending
on the downloaded information.
➣ Even if you set the On-screen display to your desired language, the
“Downloadable U.S. Rating” menu will appear in English only.
➣ The rating will automatically block certain categories that are more
restrictive.
➣ The rating titles (For example: Humor Level..etc) and TV ratings (For
example: DH, MH, H..etc) may differ depending on the broadcasting
station.
Canadian French Downloadable U.S. Rating
►
Change PIN
Move
Enter
Return
The number of current
rating information
Rating title
The number of all
rating information
Downloadable U.S. Rating
►
Humor Level
1/2
DH
Allow All
MH
Block All
H
VH
EH
Move
Enter
Return
How to Reset the TV after the V-Chip Blocks a Channel (“Emergency Escape”)
If the TV is tuned to a restricted channel, the V-Chip will block it. The screen
will go blank and the following message will appear:
1.Enter your PIN.
To resume normal viewing, tune to a different channel using CH or
CH button. Under certain conditions (depending on the rating of the local
TV programs) the V-Chip might lock out all the channels. In this case, use the
V-Chip function for an “emergency escape”:
➣ If you forget the PIN, press the remote-control buttons in the following
sequence, which resets the pin to 0-0-0-0 : Power Off. → MUTE → 8 → 2
→ 4 → Power On.
Received Rating : TV-G/MPAA X/Canadian English : C8+
Use the NUMBER buttons to enter your
pin number to unlock all channels.
Press EXIT to clear PIN.
Press MENU for main menu.
English - 68
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 68
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:41
Viewing Closed Captions (On-Screen Text Messages) - Analog
Setup
The Analog Caption function operates in either analog TV channel mode or when a signal is supplied from an external
device to TV. (Depending on the broadcasting signal, the Analog Caption function may operate on digital channels.)
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Wireless Network Setup
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Caption”, then press the ENTER
button.
Caption
Caption : Off
Caption Mode
: Default
►
Digital Caption Options
Enter
button to select “Caption”. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to
3.Press the ENTER
select “On”, then press the ENTER
button.
Caption
Caption TV
Caption Mode
Digital Caption Options
VCR
• The default is “CC1”.
• CC1: The Primary Synchronous Caption Service. These are captions
in the primary language that must be in sync with the sound, preferably
matched to a specific frame.
• CC2: The Special Non-Synchronous Use Captions. This channel
carries data that is intended to augment information carried in the
program.
• CC3: Secondary Synchronous Caption Service. Alternate programrelated caption data, typically second language captions.
• CC4: Special Non-Synchronous Use Captions. Similar to CC2.
• Text1: First Text Service. This may be various non-program related
data.
• Text2: Second Text Service. Additional data, usually not program
related.
• Text3/Text4: Third and Fourth Text Services. These data channels
should be used only if Text1 and Text2 are not sufficient.
DVD
: OffOff
: Default
On
Move
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Caption Mode”, then press the ENTER
button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select submenu (Default, CC1~CC4 or
Text1~Text4) you want, the press the ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Return
Enter
STB
Return
Caption
Caption : OffDefault
Caption Mode
: Default
CC1
Digital Caption Options
CC2

Move
Enter
Return
➣ The Caption feature doesn’t work in Component, HDMI or PC modes.
➣ The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast.
O Press the CC button on the remote control to turn the Caption “On” or “Off”.
SET
RESET
English - 69
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 69
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:41
Viewing Closed Captions (On-Screen Text Messages) - Digital
Wireless Network Setup
Setup
The Digital Captions function operates on digital channels.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Caption”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ENTER
button to select “Caption”.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “On”, then press the ENTER
button.
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Caption Mode”, then press the
ENTER
button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select submenu (Default,
Service1~Service6, CC1~CC4 or Text1~Text4) you want, then press the
ENTER
button.
Caption
Caption : Off
Caption Mode
: Default
►
Digital Caption Options
5.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Digital Caption Options”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ “Digital Caption Options” are available only when “Default” and “Service
1~Service 6” can be selected in “Caption Mode”.
➣ Service1~6 in digital caption mode may not be available depending on the
broadcast.
6.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Size”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired Caption option, then press the
ENTER
button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired sub-menu
options (see options below), then press ENTER
button.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast.
➣ “Default” means to follow the standard set by the broadcaster.
➣ Foreground and Background cannot be set to have the same color.
➣ “Foreground Opacity” and “Background Opacity” cannot be both set to
Transparent.
• Size: This option consists of “Default”, “Small”, “Standard” and “Large”.
The default is “Standard”.
• Font Style: This option consists of “Default”, “Style0 ~ Style 7”. You can
change the font you want. The default is “Style 0”.
• Foreground Color: This option consists of “Default”, “White”, “Black”,
“Red”, “Green”, “Blue”, “Yellow”, “Magenta” and “Cyan”. You can
change the color of the letter. The default is “White”.
• Background Color: This option consists of “Default”, “White”, “Black”,
“Red”, “Green”, “Blue”, “Yellow”, “Magenta” and “Cyan”. You can
change the background color of the caption. The default is “Black”.
• Foreground Opacity: This option consists of “Default”, “Transparent”,
“Translucent”, “Solid” and “Flashing”. You can change the opacity of the
letter.
• Background Opacity: This option consists of “Default”, “Transparent”,
“Translucent”, “Solid” and “Flashing”. You can change the background
opacity of the caption.
• Return to Default: This option sets each of “Size”, “Font Style”,
“Foreground Color”, “Background color”, “Foreground Opacity” and
“Background Opacity” to its default.
Enter
Return
Caption
Caption : OffOff
Caption Mode
Digital Caption Options
: Default
On
TV
VCR
Move
DVD
Enter
STB
Return
Caption
Caption : OffDefault
Caption Mode
Digital Caption Options
: Default
Service 1
Service 2

Move
Size
Enter
Return
Digital Caption Options
: Default
Default
Font Style
: Default
Small
Foreground Color
: Default
Standard
Background Color
: Default
Large
Foreground Opacity
: Default
Background Opacity
: Default
Return to Default
Move
Enter
Return
O Press the CC button on the remote control to turn the Caption “On” or “Off”.
English - 70
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 70
SET
RESET
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:41
Adjusting the TV On/Off Melody Sound
V-Chip
Setup
A melody sound can be set to come on when the TV is powered On or Off.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “External Settings”, then press the
ENTER
button.
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Melody”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “Low”, “Medium” or “High”, then
press the ENTER
button.
•
•
•
•
Caption
Software Upgrade
Off: Turns off the melody function.
Low: Sets the melody volume to low.
Medium: Sets the melody volume to medium.
High: Sets the melody volume to high.
External Settings
Melody
: Medium
Off
Light Effect
: InLow
Watching TV
Wall-Mount Adjustment
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ The Melody does not play
- When no sound is output from the TV because the MUTE button has been
pressed.
- When no sound is output from the TV because the volume has been
reduced to minimum with the VOL – button.
- When the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function.
Medium
High
Move
Enter
Return
Setting the Light Effect
V-Chip
Setup
You can turn the LED on the front of TV on/off.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “External Settings” then press the
ENTER
button.
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Light Effect”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “In Standby”, “Watching TV” or
button.
“Always”, then press the ENTER
•
•
•
•
External Settings
Melody
: Medium
Off
Light Effect
Wall-Mount Adjustment
Off: LED will not come on.
In Standby: Turns the LED on in standby mode.
Watching TV: Turns the LED on while watching TV.
Always: LED will come on after you turn the TV off.
: InIn
Watching
Standby TV
Watching TV
Always
Move
Enter
Return
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ Set the “Light Effect” to “Off” to reduce power consumption.
LED
8
8
67
1
2
3
4
5
English - 71
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 71
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:42
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Setting the Entertainment mode
Setup
The “Entertainment” mode enables you to select the optimal display and sound for sports, cinema and games.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Caption
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
External Settings
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Entertainment”, then press the ENTER
Entertainment
: Off
button.
Energy
Saving
:
Off
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Off”, “Sports”, “Cinema” or “Game”, then
PIP
press the ENTER
button.
Software Upgrade
➣
➣
➣
➣
Press the EXIT button to exit.
If you set any of the three “Entertainment” modes to On, the settings will
be locked and can not be adjusted. If you want to make Picture and Sound
mode adjustments, the “Entertainment” mode must be turned off.
The “Entertainment” settings are saved for each input source.
If you set any of the three “Entertainment” modes to On, “SRS TruSurround
XT” function is not available.
In PC mode, This function is not available.
Caption
Setup
• Off: Switches the “Entertainment” function off.
• Sports: Provides the optimal picture and sound quality for sports.
• Cinema: Provides the optimal picture and sound quality for movie
watching. You can experience a richer picture and enhanced sound.
• Game: Provides the optimal picture and sound quality for games. This
mode accelerates the playing speed when using an external game
console connected to the TV.
External Settings
Entertainment
: OffOff
Energy Saving
: OffSports
►
PIP
Cinema
Software Upgrade
Game
O You can press the E.MODE button on the remote control repeatedly to
change the “Entertainment” setting.
Using the Energy Saving Feature
SET
RESET
Setup
This feature adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. When watching TV at night, set the
"Energy Saving “ mode option to “High” to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
External Settings
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
•
•
•
•
•
Off: Turns off the energy saving function.
Low: Sets the TV to low energy saving mode.
Medium: Sets the TV to medium energy saving mode.
High: Sets the TV to high energy saving mode.
Auto: Automatically adjusts the brightness of the TV screen in
accordance with the scenes.
External Settings
Setup
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Energy Saving”, then press the ENTER
button. Select the required option (Off, Low, Medium, High, Auto) by
pressing the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the ENTER
button.
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
Off
►
PIP
Low
Software Upgrade
Medium
High
Auto
Press the EXIT button to exit.
English - 72
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 72
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:42
Upgrading the Software
Samsung may offer upgrades for TV's firmware in the future. Please contact the Samsung call center at 1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) to receive information about downloading upgrades and using a USB drive. Upgrades will be possible by
connecting a USB drive to the USB port located on your TV.
1.Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade into the WISELINK port
TV Side Panel
on the side of the TV.
➣ Software can not be upgraded through the LAN connection.
HDMI IN4
➣ Please connect a single USB device having upgrade file .
USB Drive
[LN46A850S1F, LN52A850S1F]
2.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
TV Side Panel
USB Drive
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Software Upgrade”, then press the
ENTER
button.
HDMI IN4
or
4.Press the ENTER
button.
The message “Scanning for USB... It may take up to 30 seconds.” is
displayed.
[LN46A860S2F, LN52A860S2F]
Please be careful to not disconnect the power or remove the USB drive while
upgrades are being applied. The TV will turn off and turn on automatically
after completing the firmware upgrade. Please check the firmware version
after the upgrades are complete. When software is upgraded, video and
audio settings you have made will return to their default (factory) settings. We
recommend you write down your settings so that you can easily reset them
after the upgrade.
Energy Saving
Setup
5.The message “Upgrade version XXXX to version XXXX? The system would
be reset after upgrade.” is displayed.
Press the ◄ or ► to select the “OK”, then press the ENTER
button.
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
Software Upgrade
Scanning for USB.....
It may take up to 30 seconds.
Software Upgrade
Upgrade version XXXX to version XXXX? The system
would be reset after upgrade.
OK
Cancel
English - 73
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 73
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:43
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Self diagnosis
Picture Test
If you think you have a picture problem, perform the picture test. Check the color pattern on the screen to see if the problem
still exists.
1.Press and hold the
button for more than 5 seconds.
➣ “Self Diagnostic Test” appears on the screen.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture Test”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ “Does the problem still exist with this test pattern?” appears on the
screen.
Self Diagnostic Test
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Yes” or “No”.
Picture Test
Sound Test
➣ If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern,
select “Yes”.
Model No. xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
➣ If the test pattern is properly displayed, select “No”.
• Yes: There may be a problem with the TV. Contact the Samsung Call
center at 1-800 SAMSUNG.
• No: There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please
check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external
device’s user manual.
Move
Enter
Exit
Does the problem still exist with this test pattern?
Yes
TV
VCR
DVD
No
STB
Sound Test
If you think you have a sound problem, please perform the sound test. You can
check the sound by playing a built-in melody sound through the TV.
1.Press and hold the
button for more than 5 seconds.
➣ “Self Diagnostic Test” appears on the screen.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound Test”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ “Does the problem still exist with this sound test?” appears on the screen.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Yes” or “No”.
➣ If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or
from no speaker at all, select “Yes”.
➣ If you can normally hear the sound from the speakers, select “No”.
• Yes: There may be a problem with the TV. Contact theSamsung Call
center at 1-800-SAMSUNG.
• No: There may be a problem with your external equipment.Please
check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external
device’s user manual.
Self Diagnostic Test
SET
RESET
Picture Test
Sound Test
Model No. xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Move
Enter
Exit
Does the problem still exist with this sound test?
No
Yes
➣ If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound
test, make sure “Select Speaker” is set to “TV speaker” in the Sound
menu.
➣ The melody will be heard during the test even if “Select Speaker” is set to
“External Speaker” or the sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button.
➣ If headphones are connected, the test melody will play through the headphones.
SET
RESET
English - 74
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 74
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:44
WISELINK Pro
Using the WISELINK Pro Function
Connecting a USB Device
➣ LN46A850S1F and LN52A850S1F only have one USB port.
➣ LN46A860S2F and LN52A860S2F have two USB ports.
You can view movies and photos and listen to music files stored on a USB Mass
Storage Class (MSC) device.
1.Press the POWER button on the remote control or front panel.
➣ The TV is powered on.
2.Connect a USB device containing JPEG, MP3 and/or Movie files to the
WISELINK jack (USB jack) on the side of the TV.
TV Side Panel
HDMI IN4
USB Drive
[LN46A850S1F, LN52A850S1F]
➣ If you enter the WISELINK Pro mode with no USB device connected the
message “No external storage device found. Check the connection status.”
will appear. In this case, insert the USB device, exit the screen by pressing
TV Side Panel
USB Drive
the W.LINK button on the remote control and enter the WISELINK Pro screen
again.
➣ MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported.
➣ The file system only supports FAT16/32 (The NTFS file system is not
HDMI IN4
supported).
or
➣ Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be
compatible with this TV.
➣ WISELINK Pro only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC
is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC are
Thumb drives and Flash Card Readers (Both USB HDD and HUB are not
supported.)
[LN46A860S2F, LN52A860S2F]
➣ Please connect directly to the USB port of your TV. If you are using a
separate cable connection, there may be a USB compatibility problem.
➣ Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent
them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss.
➣ Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading.
➣ MSC supports MP3 and JPEG files, while a PTP device supports JPEG files only.
➣ The sequential jpeg format is supported.
➣ Photo and audio files must be named in English, French or Spanish. If not, the files can not be played. Change the file
names to English, French or Spanish if necessary.
➣ The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen.
➣ The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels.
➣ For unsupported or corrupted files, the “Not Supported File Format” message is displayed.
➣ If the number of photo files exceeds 4000 (or the number of music files exceeds 3000), any files exceeding the 4000
limit may not be displayed in the Photo List (or Music List).
➣ MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management
(DRM) is a technology that supports the creation of content, the distribution and management of the content in an
integrated and comprehensive way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the
prevention of the illegal copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements.
➣ If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time. (Applicable to models LN46A860S2F,
LN52A860S2F only)
➣ If more than one MSC device is connected, some of them may not be recognized. If a device requires high power
(more than 500mA or 5V), the USB device may not be supported. (Applicable to models LN46A860S2F, LN52A860S2F
only)
English - 75
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 75
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:46
Using the Remote Control Button in WISELINK Pro Menu
Button
Operations
Wheel
(▲/▼/◄/►)
Move the cursor and select an item.
ENTER
Select the currently selected item.
While playing a slide show, movie, or music file:
- Pressing the ENTER
button during play pauses play.
- Pressing the ENTER
button during pause resumes play.
/
RETURN
TOOLS
Play or pause the Slide Show, Music or Movie file.
Return to the previous menu.
Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus.
Stop the current slide show, Music or Movie file.
/
INFO
W.LINK
CH /
PRE.CH / FAV.CH / CH.LIST
EXIT
SOURCE
Jump to previous group / Jump to next group.
Show file information.
Exit WISELINK Pro mode.
Stop WISELINK Pro mode and Returns to TV mode.
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Stop the current function and return to the WISELINK Pro main menu.
Stop WISELINK Pro mode and show the source list.
Using the WISELINK Pro Menu
1.Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Application”,
then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “WISELINK Pro”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The “WISELINK Pro” menu is displayed.
WISELINK Pro
TV
VCR
SUM
DVD
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
STB
PHOTO
or
Photo
Music
Movie
SUM
Setup
 Device
R Return
O Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
or
O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control repeatedly to select
“USB”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the Red button, then press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the
corresponding USB Memory Device (i.e. if connected through a hub, or if you have two USB devices connected
(LN46A860S2F, LN52A860S2F only)).
Press the ENTER
button.
➣ This function differs depending on the USB Memory Device connected to TV.
➣ The selected USB device name appears at the bottom left of the screen.
➣ If you have two USB devices connected simultaneously (LN46A860S2F, LN52A860S2F) they will be shown by
name in the order they were inserted.
4.Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then press the ENTER
button.
SET
RESET
➣ To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote control.
English - 76
SET
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 76
RESET
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:46
Using the Photo List
This menu shows Photo files saved on an USB memory device.
Photo List
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Photo”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Photo files are displayed.
➣ This menu only shows files whose file extension is jpg. Files of other
formats such as bmp or tiff will not be displayed.
➣ Press the
(Play) / ENTER
button to start the Slide Show.
➣ To move to the previous / next group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
➣ When moving to a photo, loading may take a few seconds. At this
point, the loading icon will appear on the screen.
➣ It may take some time to load photo files as Thumbnail images.
WISELINK Pro
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
SUM
PHOTO
Photo
Music
Movie
Setup
SUM
 Device
e Exit
Photo
Image001.jpg
Preference
Monthly
★★★
Jan
SUM
Nov
▲
Timeline
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Screen Display
1File(s) Selected5
Photo
1
Image001.jpg
★★★
Preference
Monthly 2
SUM4
Nov3
Jan
▲
Timeline
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
6
Option
English - 77
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 77
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:48
1 Currently selected photo
Shows the currently selected photo.
2 Current Sort Standard
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to change the standard for sorting photos. (“Monthly”, “Timeline”, “Color”, “Composition”,
“Folder”, “Preference”)
The item that is selected as the sorting standard is highlighted in the Photo Information Window.
3 View Groups
Shows the sorting groups. The sorting group including the currently selected photo is highlighted.
4 Current Device
Shows the currently selected device name. Press the Red button to select a device.
5 Item Selection Information
Shows the number of photos that are selected by pressing the Yellow button.
6 Help Items
• Red(Device) button: Selects a connected device.
• Green(Favorites Setting) button: Changes the favorites setting for the selected photo. Press this button
repeatedly until the desired value appears. (Refer to page 81)
• Yellow(Select) button: Selects photos from the photo list. Selected photos are marked with a symbol on the left.
•
(Jump) button: Jumps to the previous sorting group / Jumps to the next sorting group.
• TOOLS(Option) button: Displays the “Slide Show”, “Play Current Group”, “Rotate”, “Delete”, “Change Group Info”
(in “Color” or “Composition” group),“Information” or “Safe Remove” menus.
Sorting Photo List
You can sort photos in the Photo List by a particular standard.
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Photo”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Photo files are displayed.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a sorting standard.
(“Monthly”, “Timeline”, “Color”, “Composition”, “Folder”, “Preference”)
➣ The photos are sorted according to the newly selected sorting
standard.
4.Press the ENTER
button to start the Slide Show in the order selected
by the user.
➣ WISELINK Pro identifies the color and composition of images and
groups them accordingly by analyzing the images on the USB device.
➣ The “Composition” and “Color” information extracted from a photo file
may be different from what you selected.
➣ Photo information is automatically set. You can change the “Color”,
“Composition”, and “Favorite”.
➣ Photos for which information cannot be displayed are set as
“Unclassified”.
➣ PTP does not support folder sort mode.
WISELINK Pro
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
SUM
PHOTO
Photo
Music
Movie
SUM
Setup
 Device
e Exit
Photo
Image001.jpg
Preference
Monthly
Timeline
SUM
★★★
Jan
Nov
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
English - 78
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 78
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:48
Monthly
You can sort and play photos by month.
➣ It sorts and shows photos in the file by month. It sorts only by month (from
January to December) regardless of year.
1. Select “Monthly” as the sorting standard in the Photo List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of photos grouped by
Month.
(REW) or
➣ To move to the previous / next month group, press the
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current
Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of photo files from the sublist.
Photo
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
▼
Preference
Monthly
★★★
Jan
SUM
Nov
▲
Timeline
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Timeline
You can sort and play photos by timeline.
➣ It sorts and shows photos by date. It sorts by year and month from the
earliest photo.
1. Select “Timeline” as the sorting standard in the Photo List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of photos grouped by
Timeline.
(REW)
➣ To move to the previous / next timeline group, press the
or
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current
Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of photo files from the sublist.
Photo
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
▼
★★★
Monthly
Timeline
2008
Color
SUM
2008
Nov
Jan
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Color
You can sort and play photos by color.
1. Select “Color” as the sorting standard in the Photo List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of photos grouped by
color.
(REW) or
➣ To move to the previous / next color group, press the
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current
Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of photo files from the sublist.
Changing the color information of a selected photo
➣ You can change a selected photo file’s (or group of files) color information
in order to move it from one color group to another.
➣ This does not change the actual color of the photo.
1.Select “Color” as the sorting standard in the Photo List and press the
◄ or ► button to select a photo.
➣ Changing the information of multiple photos
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
Then press the yellow button.
Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos.
The mark appears to the left of the selected photo.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Change Group Info”.
Press the ENTER
button.
4.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired color option, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The group information of the current file is updated and the photos are
moved to the new color group.
➣ “Color” options: Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Magenta, Black, Gray,
Unclassified.
Photo
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
▼
★★★
Timeline
Color
Composition
SUM
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Photo
Image001.jpg
▲
Rotate
Delete
Change Group Info
Information
▼
★★★
Timeline
Color
Composition
SUM
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Photo
Jump
Option
Jump
Option
Image001.jpg
Timeline
Color
Composition
SUM
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
English - 79
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 79
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:50
Composition
You can sort and play photos by composition.
1. Select “Composition” as the sorting standard in the Photo List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of photos grouped by
compositon.
➣ To move to the previous / next composition group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play
Current Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of photo files from the
sublist.
Changing the composition information of a selected photo
➣ You can change a selected photo file’s (or group of files) composition
information in order to move it from one composition group to another.
1.Select “Composition” as the sorting standard in the Photo List and press
the ◄ or ► button to select a photo.
➣ Changing the information of multiple photos
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
Then press the yellow button.
Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos.
The mark appears to the left of the selected photo.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Change Group Info”.
Press the ENTER
button.
4.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the composition option, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The group information of the current file is updated and the photos
are moved to the new composition group.
➣ “Composition” options:
(horizontal),
(vertical),
(object),
(perspective),
(pattern), Unclassified
Photo
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
▼
Color
Composition
Folder
SUM
Unclassified
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Photo
▲
Jump
Option
Image001.jpg
▲
Rotate
Delete
Change Group Info
Information
▼
Color
Composition
Folder
SUM
Unclassified
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Photo
▲
Jump
Option
Image001.jpg
Unclassified
Color
Composition
Folder
SUM
Unclassified
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Folder
You can sort and play photos by folder.
➣ If there are many folders in USB, the photos files are shown in order in
each folder. The photo file in the Root folder is shown first and the others
are shown in alphabetical order by name.
1. Select “Folder” as the sorting standard in the Photo List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of photos grouped by
folder.
(REW) or
➣ To move to the previous / next folder group, press the
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play
Current Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of photo files from the
sublist.
Photo
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
▼
Composition
Folder
Preference
SUM
★★★
P-other
Photo-1
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
English - 80
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 80
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:52
Preference
You can sort and play photos by preference. (Favorite)
1. Select “Preference” as the sorting standard in the Photo List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of photos grouped by
preference.
➣ To move to the previous / next preference group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current
Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of photo files from the sublist.
Changing the Favorites setting
➣ You can change a selected photo file’s (or group of files) preference
information in order to move it from one preference group to another.
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
2. Press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears.
➣ Favorites settings change completed.
➣ “Favorite” options: ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
➣ Users can select the number of stars (up to 3) according to their
preference.
➣ The stars are for grouping purposes only. For example, the 3 star setting
does not have any priority over the one star setting.
Photo
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
▼
Folder
Preference
Monthly
SUM
★★★
★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★
▲
★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Photo
Image001.jpg
Folder
Preference
Monthly
SUM
★★★
★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★
▲
★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Rotating the Photo file
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Rotate”, then press the ENTER
Press the ◄ or ► button repeatedly to rotate the photo by the desired
amount.
➣ Whenever you press the ◄ button, it rotates by 270˚, 180˚, 90˚, and 0˚.
➣ Whenever you press the ► button, it rotates by 90˚, 180˚, 270˚, and 0˚.
➣ The Rotating function information icon is displayed.
Icon
Current OSD
Function
0˚
Rotating (0°)
This rotates a photo to its original
position
90°
Rotating (90°)
This rotates a photo by 90 degrees
180°
Rotating (180°)
This rotates a photo by 180 degrees
270°
Rotating (270°)
This rotates a photo by 270 degrees
Photo
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
▼
Preference
Monthly
★★★
Jan
Timeline
SUM
Nov
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Photo
Image001.jpg
Preference
Monthly
Timeline
SUM
0˚
★★★
Jan
Nov
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
English - 81
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 81
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:53
Deleting the Photo file
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Delete”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The “Delete this file?” message appears.
4.Press the ◄ or ►button to select “OK”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The photo is deleted.
➣ When a read-only file is deleted, the “Read-only file(s). Delete the
file(s)?” message appear.
➣ If you select “Cancel”, the deletion is cancelled.
5.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
➣ You cannot remove the PTP-connected digital camera picture files.
➣ While removing files, don’t remove the USB memory device.
➣ You cannot recover a deleted photo file.
Photo
Image001.jpg
▲
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
Information
▼
Preference
Monthly
★★★
Jan
SUM
Nov
▲
Timeline
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Delete
Selected File(s) :Image0... 1 File(s)
Delete this file?
OK
Cancel
Deleting Multiple Photos
1.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
Then press the yellow button.
➣ Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos.
➣ The mark appears to the left of the selected photo.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Delete selected File”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The “Delete the selected file(s)?” message appears.
4.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “OK”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The selected photos are deleted.
➣ If you select “Cancel”, the deletion is cancelled.
5.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
➣ You cannot remove the read-only files from the selected ones.
➣ You cannot recover a deleted photo file.
Photo
2File(s) Selected
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Delete selected File
Deselect All
Safe Remove
Preference
Monthly
★★★
Jan
Timeline
SUM
Nov
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Delete
Selected File(s) :Image0... 2 File(s)
Delete the selected file(s)?
TV
OK
VCR
DVD
STB
Cancel
Viewing the Photo Information
The photo file information including the order of the file in the current directory,
the name, the size, the resolution, the date modified and the path is displayed.
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Information”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The information on the selected photo appears.
Photo
Image001.jpg
▲
Rotate
Delete
Information
Safe Remove
Preference
Monthly
★★★
Jan
Timeline
SUM
Nov
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Photo Info
Name
Size
Resolution
Date
Path
: Image001.jpg
: 2.0MB
: 440x440
: Jan.1.2008
: /Photo/
OK
O Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
English - 82
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 82
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:54
Viewing a Photo or Slide Show
Viewing a Slide Show
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to move to “Photo”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Photo files are displayed.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
4. Press the TOOLS button.
5.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Slide Show”, then press the
button.
ENTER
Photo
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
▼
Preference
★★★
Monthly
Jan
Timeline
SUM
Nov
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
➣ All files in the photo list will be used for the Slide Show.
20/22 Image001.jpg 440x440
Jump
2.0KB
Option
2008/1/1
➣ During the slide show, files are displayed in order from the currently
shown file.
➣ The Slide Show progresses in the order sorted in the Photo list.
➣ Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the
“Background Music” is set to “On”. (Refer to page 85).
SUM
E Slide Show
Previous
Next
Option
Return
(Play) / ENTER
button on the remote control to start the Slide Show.
O While a photo list is displayed, press the
SET
To perform a SlideShow with only the selected files
RESET
1.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
Then press the yellow button. Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos.
➣ The mark appears to the left of the selected photo.
➣ If you select one file, the SlideShow will not be performed.
2. Press the
(Play) / ENTER
button.
➣ The selected files will be used for the Slide Show.
➣ If you have selected files, only the selected files will be used for the Slide Show.
Playing current group
1.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a sorting standard.
(“Monthly”, “Timeline”, “Color”, “Composition”, “Folder”, “Preference”)
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
➣ To move to the previous / next group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
3. Press the TOOLS button.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current Group”, then press the
ENTER
button. Only the photos in the sorting group including the
selected files will be used for the Slide Show.
5.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
Photo
Image001.jpg
Silde Show
Play Current Group
Rotate
Delete
▼
Preference
Monthly
Timeline
SUM
★★★
Jan
Nov
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Slide show function information icon (Displayed at the top left of the screen)
Icon
►
❙❙
Current OSD
Function
(Photo) SlideShow
Photo Slide Show is in progress.
Photo Pause
You can pause a Slide Show by pressing the
(Pause)/ENTER
button
on the remote control during a Slide Show.
To resume the Slide Show, press the
(Play)/ENTER
button on the
remote control again.
English - 83
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 83
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:55
Viewing a photo
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to move to “Photo”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Photo files are displayed.
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the Photo list.
Then Press the Yellow button to select only one file.
4. Press the ENTER
button over a photo icon.
➣ The currently selected photo is displayed in full screen.
20/22 Image001.jpg 440x440
SUM
E Slide Show
Previous
2.0KB
Next
2008/1/1
Option
Return
Using the option menu during a slide show (or Viewing a Photo)
1.During a slide show(or viewing a photo), press the TOOLS button to set the option.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option. Then press the ENTER
button.
Start Slide Show (or Stop Slide Show)
You can start or stop a Slide Show.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Start Slide Show” (or “Stop Slide Show”),
then press the ENTER
button.
Tools
Stop Slide Show
Rotate
Zoom
Slide Show Speed : Normal
Background Music :
Off
Background Music Setting
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Move
Rotate
You can rotate images in full screen mode.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Rotate”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ◄ or ► button repeatedly to rotate the photo by the desired amount.
➣ Whenever you press the ◄ button, it rotates by 270˚, 180˚, 90˚, and 0˚.
➣ Whenever you press the ► button, it rotates by 90˚, 180˚, 270˚, and 0˚.
➣ If you have selected “Zoom”, the “Rotate” deactivated.
➣ The rotated file is not saved.
➣ The Rotating function information icon is displayed at the top right of the
screen
Icon
Current OSD
0°
Rotating (0°)
90°
180°
270°
Rotating (90°)
Rotating (180°)
Rotating (270°)
Enter e Exit
90°
Function
This rotates a photo to its original
position
This rotates a photo by 90 degrees
This rotates a photo by 180 degrees
This rotates a photo by 270 degrees
English - 84
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 84
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:56
Zoom
You can zoom into images in full screen mode.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Zoom”, then press the ENTER
button.
Press the ◄ or ► button repeatedly to increase or decrease the Zoom effect.
(x1 → x2 → x4)
To move the enlarged photo image, press the ENTER
button, then press
the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons.
➣ Note that when the enlarged picture is smaller than the original screen
size, the location change function doesn’t work.
➣ The enlarged file is not saved.
➣ If you have selected “Rotate”, the “Zoom” deactivate
➣ Zoom function information icon is displayed at the top right of the screen.
Icon
Current OSD
Function
x2
Zoom (x 2)
Zoom-into a photo at 2x.
x4
Zoom (x 4)
Zoom-into a photo at 4x.
x1
Zoom (x 1)
Restore a photo to its original size.
Pan Down
Pan Up
Pan Right
Pan Left
Pan down to view the lower part of a
zoomed-in photo.
Pan up to view the upper part of a
zoomed-in photo.
Pan right to view the right side of a
zoomed-in photo.
Pan left to view the left side of a
zoomed-in photo.
Slide Show Speed
You can select the slide show speed.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Slide Show Speed”.
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired option. (Fast → Slow → Normal)
➣ You can select the SlideShow speed only during a slide show.
➣ You can also change the speed of the Slide Show by pressing the
(REW) or
(FF) key during the Slide Show.
X2
X2
n Move
• On: When the background music is available, if you select On, the music
is played back. To use this feature, there must be music and photo files
stored on the USB device.
• Off: Background music is not played.
Return
Tools
Stop Slide Show
Rotate
Zoom
Slide Show Speed ◄ Normal ►
Background Music :
Off
Background Music Setting
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Move
Background Music
If you set ”Background Music” to On, the background music will be played
when viewing photos one by one or in a Slide Show.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Background Music”.
Press the ◄ or ► button to select “On” or “Off”.
➣ If you set ”Background Music” to On, a screen appears immediately where
you can set the Background Music.
Enter
Adjust
e Exit
Tools
Stop Slide Show
Rotate
Zoom
Slide Show Speed : Normal
Background Music ◄ Off ►
Background Music Setting
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Move
Adjust
e Exit
English - 85
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 85
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:56
Tools
Background Music Setting
You can set the background music.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Background Music Setting”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ If you turn off the “Background Music”, even if the “Background Music
Settings” have been set up, the background music will not be played.
Stop Slide Show
Rotate
Zoom
Slide Show Speed : Normal
Background Music :
Off
Background Music Setting
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Move
Enter e Exit
Background Music setting
➣ Music files must be loaded and playing to change the BGM mode.
➣ “Background Music setting” menu is displayed.
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired BGM (Background music)
mode. (Shuffle, Selected file, Mood)
BGM Mode
◄
BGM Mood
:
Shuffle
►
Calm
Select Music File
• Shuffle: Plays music files in random order.
• Selected file: Plays a selected music file.
• Mood: Plays music files of a particular mood only.
Move
Adjust
Enter
Return
Background Music setting
BGM Mode
◄ Selected file ►
BGM Mood
:
Calm
Select Music File
➣ Selecting the background music file
Press the ◄ or ► button to set “BGM Mode” to “Selected file”.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Select Music File”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a music file, then press the yellow
button.
The mark appears to the left of the selected music.
Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files.
Press the ENTER
button.
Move
Enter
Return
Background Music setting
../Music/
2 File(s) Selected
Upper Folder
Thanks
I Love You
Better than yesterday
 Select
➣ Selecting the background music file mood
Press the ◄ or ► button to set “BGM Mode” to Mood”.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “BGM Mood”. Then press ◄ or ►
button to select the desired BGM mood. Press the ENTER
button.
BGM mode option: Energetic, Rhythmical, Sad, Exciting, Calm
➣ WISELINK Pro identifies and analyzes the mood the of music files on
the USB device and groups them accordingly.
▼
Move
Enter
Return
Background Music setting
BGM Mode
:
Mood
BGM Mood
◄
Calm
►
Select Music File
Move
Adjust
Enter
Return
Picture Setting
You can set the Picture mode. (Refer to page 100)
Sound Setting
You can set the Sound mode. (Refer to page 100)
Information
The photo file information including the order of the file in the current directory, the name, the size, the resolution, the date
modified and the path is displayed. (Refer to page 82)
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Safe Remove”, then press the ENTER
Remove the USB device from the TV.
button.
English - 86
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 86
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:57
Using the Music List
This menu shows MP3 files from among the files saved on a USB memory
device.
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
WISELINK Pro
Music
Photo
Music
Movie
Setup
SUM
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Music”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Music files are displayed.
➣ Press the
(Play) / ENTER
button over a music icon to play
the music.
➣ To move to the previous / next group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
SUM
 Device
e Exit
Music
Thanks
I Love You
Jee
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Energetic
Preference
Title
Artist
SUM
F
Catherine
Album 3
2005
Pop
Sad
★★★
G
H
Better than yesterday
★★★
I
J
Calm
L
P
★★★
S
T
V
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Screen Display
Music
1File(s) Selected 5
Thanks
Better than yesterday
Jee
Darby
Catherine
Album 1
2005
Blues
Album 2
2005
Pop
Album 3
2005
Pop
Energetic
Preference
Title
Artist
1
I Love You
★★★
Sad
★★★
Calm
★★★
2
G
H
SUM4
I
▲
J
L
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
P
S
T
Jump
3
V
6
Option
1 Currently selected music
Shows the currently selected music.
2 Current Sort Standard
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to change the standard for sorting music files.
(“Title”, “Artist”, “Mood”, “Genre”, “Folder”, “Preference”)
3 View Groups
Shows the sorting groups. The sorting group including the currently selected music file is highlighted.
4 Current Device
Shows the currently selected device name. Press the Red button to select a device.
English - 87
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 87
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:57
5 Item Selection Information
Shows the number of music files that are selected by pressing the Yellow button.
6 Help Items
• Red(Device) button: Selects a connected device.
• Green(Favorites Setting) button: Changes the favorites setting for the selected music. Press this button
repeatedly until the desired value appears. (Refer to page 90)
• Yellow(Select) button: Selects music files from the music list. Selected music files are marked with a symbol
the left.
•
(Jump) button: Jumps to the previous sorting group / Jumps to the next sorting group.
• TOOLS(Option) button: Displays the “Play Current Group”, “Delete”, “Change Group Info” (in “Mood” group),
“Information” or “Safe Remove” menus.
on
Sorting Music List
You can sort music files in the Music List by a particular standard.
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the WISELINK
Pro menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Music”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Music files are displayed.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a sorting standard.
(“Title”, “Artist”, “Mood”, “Genre”, “Folder”, “Preference”)
➣ Music files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting
standard.
4.Press the ENTER
button to start playing music in the order selected by
the user.
➣ Music information is set automatically and you can change the
Favorite information.
➣ Music files for which information cannot be displayed are set to
“Unclassified”.
➣ If there is no title information for a music file, the filename is displayed.
➣ If no information is available for the Genre, Artist, Album, or Year, the
corresponding item is displayed as blank.
WISELINK Pro
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
SUM
Music
Photo
Music
Movie
Setup
SUM
 Device
e Exit
Music
Thanks
I Love You
Better than yesterday
Jee
Darby
Catherine
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Album 3
2005
Pop
Energetic
★★★
Preference
F
G
H
Title
Artist
SUM
Sad
Calm
★★★
I
▲
J
L
P
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
★★★
S
T
Jump
V
Option
Title
You can sort and play music files by title.
➣ It sorts and displays the Music titles in alphabetical order.
1. Select “Title” as the sorting standard in the Music List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of music files grouped
in alphabetical order.
➣ To move to the previous / next title group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
3. Press the TOOLS button.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current Group”.
5.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of music files from the
sublist.
Music
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Energetic
Preference
Title
Artist
SUM
than yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Group
Delete
Catherine
InformationAlbum 3
2005
Safe Remove
Pop
I Love You
Jee
★★★
Sad
F
G
H
★★★
I
▲
J
L
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Calm
P
★★★
S
Jump
T
V
Option
English - 88
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 88
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:58
Artist
You can sort and play music files by artist.
➣ It sorts the music file by artist in alphabetical order.
1. Select “Artist” as the sorting standard in the Music List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of music files grouped
in alphabetical order.
➣ To move to the previous / next artist group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
3. Press the TOOLS button.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current Group”.
5.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of music files from the sublist.
Music
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Sad
★★★
Title
Sad
Catherine
Darby
▲
Artist
Mood
SUM
than yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Group
Delete
Catherine
InformationAlbum 3
2005
Safe Remove
Pop
I Love You
Jee
Exciting
★★★
Darby
Darby
★★★
Darby
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jee
Jump
Jee
Option
Mood
You can sort and play music files by mood.
Music
1. Select “Mood” as the sorting standard in the Music List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of music files grouped
by mood.
➣ To move to the previous / next mood group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
3. Press the TOOLS button.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current Group”.
5.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of music files from the
sublist.
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Sad
★★★
Artist
Sad
Rhythmical
Mood
Genre
SUM
▼
Exciting
★★★
Sad
▲
★★★
Exciting
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Calm
Jump
...
Option
Music
Thanks
Changing the Mood information of a selected music file
➣ You can change a selected music file’s (or group of files) mood
information in order to move it from one mood group to another.
1.Select “Mood” as the sorting standard in the Music List and press the
◄ or ► button to select a music file.
➣ Changing the information of multiple music files
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music in the Music list.
Then press the yellow button.
Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files.
The mark appears to the left of the selected music file.
than Group
yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Delete
Catherine
Change Group Info
Album 3
Information2005
Pop
I Love You
Jee
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Sad
★★★
Artist
Sad
Rhythmical
Mood
Genre
SUM
than Group
yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Delete
Catherine
Change Group Info
Album 3
Information2005
Pop
I Love You
Jee
▼
★★★
Sad
▲
Exciting
★★★
Exciting
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Calm
Jump
...
Option
Music
Thanks
I Love You
Better than yesterday
Jee
Darby
Catherine
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Album 3
2005
Pop
2. Press the TOOLS button.
Sad
★★★
Sad
★★★
Exciting
Energetic Rhythmical
Sad
Exciting
Calm
Unclassified
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Change Group Info”. Press the
ENTER
button.
Mood
➣ WISELINK Pro identifies the mood of the music files and groups them
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
SUM
accordingly by analyzing the music files on the USB device.
➣ “Mood” information extracted from a music file may not always match
the Mood option. For example, a file you think is “Energetic” may be
extracted to the “Exciting” mood option.
4.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired mood option, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The group information is updated and the music files are moved to the new mood group.
➣ “Mood” options: Energetic, Rhythmical, Sad, Exciting, Calm, Unclassified
Artist
Genre
Rhythmical
Sad
▲
Exciting
★★★
Calm
...
Option
English - 89
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 89
2008-07-18 �� 10:24:59
Genre
You can sort and play music files by genre.
1. Select “Genre” as the sorting standard in the Music List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of music files grouped
by Genre.
➣ To move to the previous / next genre group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
3. Press the TOOLS button.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current Group”.
5.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of music files from the sublist.
Music
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Sad
Sad
★★★
Mood
Other
Genre
Folder
SUM
than yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Group
Delete
Catherine
InformationAlbum 3
2005
Safe Remove
Pop
I Love You
Jee
Pop
Exciting
★★★
R&B
Soundtr...
Top 40
★★★
Acid Jazz
Ball..
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Folder
You can sort and play music files by folder.
➣ If there are many folders in USB, the files are shown in order in each
folder. The music file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are
shown in alphabetical order by name.
1. Select “Folder” as the sorting standard in the Music List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of music files grouped
by Folder.
(REW) or
➣ To move to the previous / next folder group, press the
(FF) button.
3. Press the TOOLS button.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current Group”.
5.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of music files from the sublist.
Music
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Sad
Album 2
2005
Pop
★★★
Genre
Sad
Other
Folder
Preference
SUM
than Group
yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Delete
Catherine
InformationAlbum 3
2005
Safe Remove
Pop
I Love You
Jee
Exciting
★★★
★★★
Music
Other2
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Preference
You can sort and play music files by preference. (Favorite)
1. Select “Preference” as the sorting standard in the Music List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of music files grouped
by Preference.
➣ To move to the previous / next preference group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
3. Press the TOOLS button.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current Group”.
5.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of music files from the sublist.
Changing the Favorites setting
➣ You can change a selected music file’s (or group of files) preference
information in order to move it from one preference group to another.
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music in the music list.
2. Press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears.
➣ Favorites settings change completed.
➣ “Favorite” options: ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
➣ Users can select the number of stars (up to 3) according to their
preference.
➣ The stars are for grouping purposes only. For example, the 3 star
setting does not have any priority over the one star setting.
Music
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Sad
★★★
Folder
Preference
Title
SUM
than Group
yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Delete
Catherine
InformationAlbum 3
2005
Safe Remove
Pop
I Love You
Jee
Sad
★ ★ ★
★★★
★ ★ ★
▲
Exciting
★★★
★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Music
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Sad
★★★
Folder
Preference
Title
SUM
I Love You
Jee
★ ★ ★
Sad
Better than yesterday
Catherine
Album 3
2005
Pop
★★★
★ ★ ★
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Exciting
★★★
★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★
Jump
Option
English - 90
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 90
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:01
Deleting the Music file
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file in the music list.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Delete”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The (for example) “Delete this file?” message appears.
4.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “OK”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The music is deleted.
➣ When a read-only file is deleted, the “Read-only file(s). Delete the
file(s)?” message appear.
➣ If you select “Cancel”, the deletion is cancelled.
5.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
➣ While removing files, don’t remove the USB memory device.
➣ You cannot recover deleted music files.
Music
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Energetic
★★★
Preference
Artist
SUM
Sad
Calm
★★★
F
G
H
Title
than yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Group
Delete
Catherine
InformationAlbum 3
2005
Safe Remove
Pop
I Love You
Jee
I
▲
J
L
P
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
★★★
S
T
Jump
V
Option
Delete
Selected File(s) :I Love Y... 1 File(s)
Delete this file?
OK
Cancel
Deleting Multiple Music files
1.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music in the music list.
Then press the yellow button.
➣ Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files.
➣ The mark appears to the left of the selected music files.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Delete selected File”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The “Delete the selected file(s)?” message appears.
4.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “OK”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The selected music files are deleted.
➣ If you select “Cancel”, the deletion is cancelled.
5.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
➣ You cannot remove the read-only files from the selected ones.
➣ You cannot restore the deleted music files.
Music
2File(s) Selected
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Energetic
★★★
Preference
Artist
SUM
2005
Pop
Sad
Calm
★★★
F
G
H
Title
Better
than yesterday
Delete
selected
File
Deselect All
Catherine
Safe Remove
Album 3
I Love You
Jee
I
▲
J
L
P
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
★★★
S
T
Jump
V
Option
Delete
Selected File(s) :I Love Y... 2 File(s)
TV
VCR
DVD
Delete the selected file(s)?
OK
STB
Cancel
Viewing the Information
The music file information including the order of the file in the current directory,
the name, the size, the date modified and the path is displayed.
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music in the music list.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Information”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The information on the selected file appears.
Music
Thanks
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Energetic
★★★
Preference
Title
Artist
SUM
than yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Group
Delete
Catherine
InformationAlbum 3
2005
Safe Remove
Pop
I Love You
Jee
Sad
F
G
H
★★★
I
▲
J
L
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Calm
P
★★★
S
Jump
T
V
Option
Music Info
Name
Size
Date
Path
: I Love You.mp3
: 5.2MB
: Jan.1.2008
: /Music/
OK
O Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
English - 91
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 91
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:02
Playing a Music File
Playing a music file
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Music”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Music files are displayed.
3.Pressing the ◄ or ► button to select a music file to be played, then press
the ENTER
button.
➣ This menu only shows files with the MP3 file extension. Files with
other file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the
same USB device.
(Play) / ENTER
button over a music icon to play
➣ Press the
the music.
➣
(REW) or
(FF) buttons do not function during play.
➣ Press the
(Pause) / ENTER
button while playing a music file
to pause the file. Press the
(Stop) button to exit Play mode.
➣ The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time.
➣ To adjust the music volume, press the VOL – or VOL + button on the
remote control. To mute the sound, press the MUTE button on the
remote control.
➣ The playing duration of a music file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if
its playing time information is not found at the start of the file.
4.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
Music
Thanks
I Love You
Better than yesterday
Jee
Darby
Catherine
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Album 3
2005
Pop
Energetic
Sad
★★★
Preference
F
G
H
Title
Artist
SUM
Calm
★★★
I
▲
J
L
P
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
7/14
★★★
S
T
Jump
00:01:15
V
Option
00:05:41
I Love You
SUM
E Pause
Previous
Next
Option
Return
Playing the music group
Music
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the WISELINK
Pro menu.
Thanks
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Music”, then press the ENTER
Jee
button.
➣ To move to the previous / next group, press the
(REW) or
Energetic
★★★
(FF) button.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file.
Title
4. Press the TOOLS button.
 Device
SUM
5.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current Group”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The music files in the sorting group including the selected file are played.
6.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote control.
Artist
Delete
Darby
Album 1
2005
Pop
Preference
than yesterday
PlayBetter
Current
Group
I Love You
Pop
Safe Remove
Sad
F
G
H
★★★
I
▲
Catherine
3
InformationAlbum
2005
Album 2
2005
Pop
J
Calm
L
 Favorites Setting  Select
P
★★★
S
Jump
T
V
Option
English - 92
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 92
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:04
Playing the selected music files
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the WISELINK
Pro menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Music”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file, then press the
yellow button. Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files.
➣ The mark appears to the left of the selected music file.
Music
2File(s) Selected
Thanks
Catherine
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Album 3
2005
Pop
★★★
Preference
Artist
(Play) / ENTER
button.
4.Press the
➣ Only the selected file is played.
➣ Press the
(Stop) button while playing to stop the current item and
to return to the music list.
5.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
SUM
Better than yesterday
Darby
Energetic
Title
I Love You
Jee
Sad
F
G
H
Calm
★★★
I
▲
J
L
P
★★★
S
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
7/14
T
Jump
00:01:15
V
Option
00:05:41
I Love You
SUM
E Pause
Previous
Next
Option
Return
Music function information icon (Displayed at the top left of the screen)
Icon
Current OSD
(Music) Repeat
(Music) Once
► / ❙❙
(Music) Play/Pause
Function
When all music files in the folder(or the selected file) are repeated.
“Repeat Mode” is “On”.
When all music files in the folder(or the selected file) are played once.
“Repeat Mode” is “Off”.
(Play)/
(Pause)/ENTER
When pressing the
remote control while music is playing.
button on the
Repeating Music Play
1. While a Music file is playing, press the TOOLS button.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Repeat Mode”.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “On” or “Off”.
Tools
Repeat Mode
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Safe Remove
• On: Plays back all music files in the folder(or the selected file)
repeatedly.
• Off: Doesn’t play back repeatedly.
Move
◄
Adjust
On
►
e Exit
4.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
Picture Setting
You can set the Picture mode. (Refer to page 100)
Sound Setting
You can set the Sound mode. (Refer to page 100)
Information
The Music file information including the order of the file.
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Safe Remove”, then press the ENTER
Remove the USB device from the TV.
button.
English - 93
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 93
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:04
Using the Movie List
This menu shows Movies files and folders saved on an USB memory device.
Movie List
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Movie”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Movie files are displayed.
➣ Press the
(Play) / ENTER
button over a movie icon to play
the movie.
➣ When moving to a movie, loading may take a few seconds. At this
point, the loading icon will appear on the screen.
➣ You can watch exciting gaming multimedia files, but the gaming
function is not supported.
➣ Movie doesn’t support subtitles. (for example, not support smi, srt and
sub files, etc and not support subtitles included in movie files)
➣ Supported Video Formats
Extension
avi
mp4
File
Video Decoder
Resolution
MPEG4 SP
800X600
MPEG4 ASP
MJPEG
H.264 BP
800X600
800X600
1920X1080
H.264 MP
1920X1080
MPEG2
1920X1080
MPEG2
1920X1080
AC3
800X600
H.264 MP
1920X1080
mpg
vro
vob
SUM
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
MOVIE
Photo
Music
Movie
SUM
Setup
 Device
e Exit
Movie
ABC.avi
Audio codec
PCM
ADPCM
AC3
PCM
ADPCM
ADPCM
PCM
AAC
PCM
AAC
AC3
Xvid
WISELINK Pro
★★★
Preference
Title
SYMBOL
ENG
□
A
SUM
M
▲
Timeline
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
\Screen Display
Movie
1File(s) Selected
5
1
ABC.avi
★★★
Preference
Title
SYMBOL
2
4
A
□
M
3
▲
Timeline
SUM
ENG
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option6
1 Currently selected movie
Shows the currently selected movie.
2 Current Sort Standard
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to change the standard for sorting Movies.
(“Title”, “Timeline”, “Folder”, “Preference”)
English - 94
BN68-01691A-Eng_2.indd 94
2008-08-06 �� 9:06:00
3 View Groups
Shows the sorting groups. The sorting group including the currently selected movie is highlighted.
4 Current Device
Shows the currently selected device name. Press the Red button to select a device.
5 Item Selection Information
Shows the number of movie files that are selected by pressing the Yellow button.
6 Help Items
• Red(Device) button: Selects a connected device.
• Green(Favorites Setting) button: Changes the favorites setting for the selected movie. Press this button
repeatedly until the desired value appears. (Refer to page 96)
• Yellow(Select) button: Selects movies from the movie list. Selected movies are marked with a symbol on the
left.
•
(Jump) button: Jumps to the previous sorting group / Jumps to the next sorting group.
• TOOLS(Option) button: Displays the “Play Current Group”, “Delete”, “Information” or “Safe Remove” menus.
Sorting Movie List
You can sort movies in the Movie List by a particular standard.
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Movie”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ Movie files are displayed.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a sorting standard.
(“Title”, “Timeline”, “Folder”, “Preference”)
➣ The movies are sorted according to the newly selected sorting
standard.
➣ Movie information is automatically set. You can change the “Favorite”.
WISELINK Pro
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
SUM
MOVIE
Photo
Music
Movie
SUM
Setup
 Device
e Exit
Movie
ABC.avi
★★★
Preference
Title
SYMBOL
ENG
□
Timeline
SUM
A
M
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Title
You can sort and play movie files by title.
➣ It sorts and displays the Movie titles in alphabetical order.
1. Select “Title” as the sorting standard in the Movie List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of movie files grouped
by Title.
(REW) or
➣ To move to the previous / next title group, press the
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play
Current Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of movie files from the
sublist.
Movie
ABC.avi
Play Current Group
Delete
Information
Safe Remove
★★★
Preference
Title
Timeline
SUM
ENG
SYMBOL
□
A
M
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
English - 95
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 95
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:07
Timeline
You can sort and play movie files by timeline.
➣ It sorts and shows movies by date. It sorts by year and month from the
earliest movie.
1. Select “Timeline” as the sorting standard in the Movie List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of movie files grouped
by Timeline.
(REW)
➣ To move to the previous / next timeline group, press the
or
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current
Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of movie files from the
sublist.
Movie
ABC.avi
Play Current Group
Delete
Information
Safe Remove
★★★
Title
Timeline
2008
Dec
▲
Folder
SUM
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Folder
You can sort and play movie files by folder.
➣ If there are many folders in USB, the movies files are shown in order in
each folder. The movie file in the Root folder is shown first and the others
are shown in alphabetical order by name.
1. Select “Folder” as the sorting standard in the Movie List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of movie files grouped
by folder.
(REW) or
➣ To move to the previous / next folder group, press the
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current
Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of movie files from the sublist.
Movie
ABC.avi
Play Current Group
Delete
Information
Safe Remove
★★★
Timeline
Folder
movie
▲
Preference
SUM
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Preference
You can sort and play movie files by preference. (Favorite)
1. Select “Preference” as the sorting standard in the Movie List.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select from the sublist of movie files grouped
by preference.
➣ To move to the previous / next preference group, press the
(REW) or
(FF) button.
3.Press the TOOLS button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current
Group”.
4.Press ENTER
to play the selected group of movie files from the
sublist.
Changing the Favorites setting
➣ You can change a selected movie file’s (or group of files) preference
information in order to move it from one preference group to another.
1.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired movie in the movie list.
2. Press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears.
➣ Favorites settings change completed.
➣ “Favorite” options: ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
➣ Users can select the number of stars (up to 3) according to their
preference.
➣ The stars are for grouping purposes only. For example, the 3 star
setting does not have any priority over the one star setting.
Movie
ABC.avi
Play Current Group
Delete
Information
Safe Remove
Folder
Preference
Title
SUM
★★★
★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★
▲
★ ★ ★
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
★ ★ ★
Jump
Option
Movie
ABC.avi
Folder
Preference
Title
SUM
★★★
★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★
▲
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★
Jump
Option
English - 96
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 96
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:09
Deleting a Movie file
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired movie in the Movie list.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Delete”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The “Delete this file?” message appears.
➣ When a read-only file is deleted, the “Read-only file(s). Delete the
file(s)?” message appear.
4.Press the ◄ or ►button to select “OK”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The movie is deleted.
➣ If you select “Cancel”, the deletion is cancelled.
5.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
➣ While deleting files, don’t remove the USB memory device.
➣ You cannot recover a deleted Movie file.
Movie
ABC.avi
Play Current Group
Delete
Information
Safe Remove
★★★
Preference
Title
SYMBOL
ENG
□
A
M
▲
Timeline
SUM
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Delete
Selected File(s) :ABC... 1 File(s)
Delete this file?
OK
Cancel
Deleting Multiple Movie files
1.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired movie in the movie list.
Then press the yellow button.
➣ Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files.
➣ The mark appears to the left of the selected movie files.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Delete selected File”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The “Delete the selected file(s)?” message appears.
4.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “OK”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The selected movie files are deleted.
➣ If you select “Cancel”, the deletion is cancelled.
5.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
➣ You cannot remove read-only files.
➣ You cannot restore the deleted Movie files.
Viewing the Movie Information
The movie file information including the order of the file in the current directory,
the name, the size, the date modified and the path is displayed.
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired movie in the movie list.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Information”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The information on the selected movie appears.
Movie
2File(s) Selected
ABC.avi
Delete selected File
Deselect All
Safe Remove
★★★
Preference
Title
SYMBOL
ENG
□
A
M
▲
Timeline
SUM
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Delete
Selected File(s) :ABC... 2 File(s)
Delete the selected file(s)?
TV
OK
VCR
DVD
STB
Cancel
Movie
ABC.avi
Play Current Group
Delete
Information
Safe Remove
★★★
Preference
Title
SYMBOL
ENG
□
A
SUM
M
▲
Timeline
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Movie Info
Name
Size
Date
Path
: ABC.avi
: 350.2MB
: Jan.1.2008
: /Movie/
OK
O Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
English - 97
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 97
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:10
Playing a Movie File
Playing a movie file
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Movie”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Pressing the ◄ or ► button to select a movie to be played, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The selected file is played.
➣ Press the
(Play) / ENTER
button over a movie icon to play
the movie.
➣ Press the
(Pause) / ENTER
button while playing a movie file
to pause the file. Press the
(Stop) button to exit Play mode.
➣ The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time.
➣ The playing duration of a movie file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if
its playing time information is not found at the start of the file.
➣ Press the ◄ button while playing a video file to rewind by 20 seconds
➣ Press the ► button to fast forward by 20 seconds.
4.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
Movie
ABC.avi
★★★
Preference
SYMBOL
Title
ENG
□
A
M
▲
Timeline
SUM
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
1/5
Jump
00:00:48
Option
00:23:05
ABC.avi
SUM
E Pause
-20sec
+20sec
Option
Return
Playing the movie group
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Movie
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Movie”, then press the ENTER
button.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired movie file.
4. Press the TOOLS button.
5.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Play Current Group”, then press the
Title
ENTER
button.
➣ The movie files in the sorting group including the selected file are
SUM
played.
6.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote control.
ABC.avi
Play Current Group
Delete
Information
Safe Remove
★★★
Preference
SYMBOL
ENG
□
A
M
▲
Timeline
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
Jump
Option
Playing the selected movie fi les
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “WISELINK
Pro” menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Movie”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired movie file, then press the
yellow button. Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files.
➣ The mark appears to the left of the selected movie file.
4. Press the
(Play) / ENTER
button.
➣ Only the selected file is played.
➣ Press the
(Stop) button while playing to stop the current item and
to return to the movie list.
5.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
Movie
2File(s) Selected
ABC.avi
★★★
Preference
SYMBOL
Title
A
M
▲
Timeline
SUM
ENG
□
 Device  Favorites Setting  Select
1/5
00:00:48
Jump
Option
00:23:05
ABC.avi
SUM
E Pause
-20sec
+20sec
Option
Return
English - 98
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 98
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:12
Playing movie continuously
If you exit playing movie, playing it continuously later is possible.
With ‘Play continuously’ function, you can watch movie without watching again
from beginning or bothering searching.
1.Select movie file you want to ‘Play continuously’ by pressing ◄ or ►
button from the Movie List.
2. Press the
(Play) / ENTER
button.
3. Select ‘Play continuously’ by pressing Blue button.
➣ Movie will begin to play from where it was stopped being played.
➣ If “Continuous Movie Play Help” function was set “On”, a pop-up
message will appear when you play movie file you want to “Play
continuously”. (Refer to page 101)
4.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
1/5
00:00:48
00:23:05
ABC.avi
 Play continuously
Resumes playing from the last viewed
scene.
SUM
 Play continuously E Pause
-20sec
Option
+20sec
Return
Movie function information icon (Displayed at the top left of the screen)
Icon
Current OSD
(Movie) Repeat
(Movie) Once
► / ❙❙
x2
Function
When all movie files in the folder(or the selected file) are repeated.
“Repeat Mode” is “On”.
When all movie files in the folder(or the selected file) are played once.
“Repeat Mode” is “Off”.
(Movie) Play/Pause
(Play)/
(Pause) / ENTER
When pressing the
remote control while movie is playing.
(Movie) x2 Play
When pressing the
playing.
button on the
(FF) button on the remote control while movie is
Repeating Movie Play
1. While a Movie file is playing, press the TOOLS button.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Repeat Mode”.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “On” or “Off”.
Tools
Repeat Mode
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Picture Size
Information
Safe Remove
• On: Plays back all movie files in the folder(or the selected file)
repeatedly.
• Off: Doesn’t play back repeatedly.
Move
4.To exit “WISELINK Pro” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
◄
On
:
Fit
Adjust
►
e Exit
Picture Setting
You can set the Picture mode. (Refer to page 100)
Sound Setting
You can set the Sound mode. (Refer to page 100)
Picture Size
• Fit: Play video to fit the TV’s screen size.
• Original: Play video at the original size.
Information
The Movie file information including the order of the file.
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Safe Remove”, then press the ENTER
Remove the USB device from the TV.
button.
English - 99
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 99
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:13
Picture/Music Settings Using WISELINK
When watching a SlideShow or listening to music using WISELINK, you can set the picture and sound.
Picture Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button during a Slide Show or while music is playing.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture Setting”.
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the “Picture Mode” (“Dynamic”,
“Standard”, or “Movie”).
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to an item. (“Contrast”, “Brightness”,
“Color”, “Dynamic Contrast”, “Black Adjust”, “Auto Motion Plus 120Hz” or
“Reset”)
➣ Select “Reset” to initialize the picture settings.
5. Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the settings.
➣ For more information on the picture settings, refer to pages 28~32.
Tools
Stop Slide Show
Rotate
Zoom
Slide Show Speed : Normal
Background Music :
Off
Background Music Setting
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Move
Enter e Exit
Picture Setting
Mode
◄
Picture
Contrast : Backlight
Color
Dynamic Contrast
Black Adjust
Auto Motion Plus 120Hz
Reset
Move
:
:
:
:
:
Standard
95
45
50
Medium
Off
Medium
►
Enter R Return
Adjust
Sound Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button during a Slide Show or while music is playing.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sound Setting”.
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select the “Sound Mode”. (“Standard”,
“Music”, “Movie”, “Speech”, or “Custom”)
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to an item.
➣ Select “Reset” to initialize the sound settings.
5. Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the settings.
➣ For more information on the sound settings, refer to pages 40~41.
Tools
Stop Slide Show
Rotate
Zoom
Slide Show Speed : Normal
Background Music :
Off
Background Music Setting
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Move
Enter e Exit
Sound Setting
Mode
◄
Sound
Balance : 100Hz
300Hz
1kHz
3kHz
10kHz
Reset
Move
:
:
:
:
:
Custom
L50 R50
0
0
0
0
0
►
Enter R Return
Adjust
Using the Setup Menu
Setup displays the user settings of the WISELINK Pro menu.
1.Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the WISELINK
Pro menu.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option.
(Slide Show Speed, Music Repeat Mode, Movie Repeat Mode, Screen
Saver Run Time, Information, Safe Remove)
4. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the option, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ To exit WISELINK Pro mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote
control.
WISELINK Pro
SUM
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
Setup
Photo
SUM
Music
Movie
Setup
 Device
e Exit
English - 100
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 100
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:13
Slide Show Speed
Setup
Select to control the slide show speed.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Slide Show Speed”.
Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Fast”, “Normal” or “Slow”.
Slide Show Speed
Music Repeat Mode
Movie Repeat Mode
Continuous Movie Play Help
Screen Saver Run Time
Information
Safe Remove
SUM
Music Repeat Mode
◄
:
:
:
:
 Device
Normal
On
On
On
5 min
Move
►
Adjust
Return
Setup
Select to repeatedly play music files.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Music Repeat Mode”.
Press the ◄ or ► button to select “On” or “Off”.
Slide Show Speed
Music Repeat Mode
Movie Repeat Mode
Continuous Movie Play Help
Screen Saver Run Time
Information
Safe Remove
SUM
:
◄
:
:
:
 Device
Normal
On On
On
5 min
Move
►
Adjust
Return
Setup
Movie Repeat Mode
Select to repeatedly play movie files.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Movie Repeat Mode”.
Press the ◄ or ► button to select “On” or “Off”.
Slide Show Speed
Music Repeat Mode
Movie Repeat Mode
Continuous Movie Play Help
Screen Saver Run Time
Information
Safe Remove
SUM
Continuous Movie Play Help
:
:
◄
:
:
 Device
Normal
On
On On
5 min
Move
►
Adjust
Return
Setup
Select to display the help pop-up message for continuous movie playback.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Continuous Movie Play Help”.
Press the ◄ or ►button to select “On” or “Off”.
Slide Show Speed
Music Repeat Mode
Movie Repeat Mode
Continuous Movie Play Help
Screen Saver Run Time
Information
Safe Remove
SUM
Screen Saver Run Time
:
:
:
◄
:
 Device
Normal
On
On
On 5 min
Move
►
Adjust
Return
Setup
Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Screen Saver Run Time”.
Press the ◄ or ► button to select “1 min”, “3 min” or “5 min”.
Slide Show Speed
Music Repeat Mode
Movie Repeat Mode
Continuous Movie Play Help
Screen Saver Run Time
Information
Safe Remove
SUM
Information
Select to viewing the information of the connected device.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Information”, then press the ENTER
button.
:
:
:
:
◄
 Device
Normal
On
On
On
5 min
Move
►
Adjust
Return
Device Info
Device Type
Device
Available Memory
Total Memory
Safe Remove
: USB
: SUM
: 852.90MB
: 995.00MB
OK
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Safe Remove”, then press the ENTER
Remove the USB device from the TV.
button.
English - 101
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 101
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:13
WISELINK Pro-DLNA
Setting the DLNA Network
DLNA allows you to watch videos and pictures saved on your PC on your TV through a network connection in Wiselink Pro
mode. This removes the need to copy them to a USB storage device and then connect the device to your TV. To use DLNA,
the TV must be connected to the network and the DLNA application must be installed on your PC.
Network Connections Diagram
TV Rear Panel
The Modem Port on
the Wall
External Modem
(ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV)
3 Modem Cable
1 LAN Cable
2 LAN Cable
1. Connect the [LAN] port
on the rear panel of the
TV to the external modem
with a LAN Cable.
2. Connect the PC to which
the “DLNA PC Share
Manager” program will be
installed and the external
modem using a LAN
cable.
3. Connect the LAN port on
the wall and the external
modem with a Modem
Cable.
PC
Connecting to the Network
1. When connecting to the network is complete, set up the network on the TV (see page 121).
➣ A Wireless Internet connection does not support DLNA.
➣ The first 3 digits (subnet address) of the IP addresses of the TV and the PC must be the same (e.g. IP Address:
123.456.789.XX )
2. Run a “Network Test” to check the network settings (see page 122).
English - 102
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 102
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:14
Installing the DLNA Application
To play content on the PC on the TV, you have to first install the application.
System Requirements
1. Insert the Program CD supplied with this TV into your PC.
2. 20MB of free hard disk space is needed for the program installation.
➣ If you share files, up to 20MB of hard disk drive space is required for each 100 files.
➣ If you cancel file sharing, the hard disk drive space used for the thumbnail information is also freed.
Supported Formats
1. Image : JPEG (jpg, jpeg)
2. Audio : MP3 (mp3)
3. Video : MPEG1(mpg, mpeg), MPEG2 PS/TS(mpg, mpeg, trp, ts, tp), divx(mpg, mpeg, avi), MPEG4 / H.264 (mpg, mpeg)
Install the application
1. Run the Setup.exe file on the Program CD supplied with the product.
➣ Alternatively, you can download the file from www.samsung.com.
2. Install the SAMSUNG PC Share Manager as shown in the figures below.
3. When the installation is complete, the PC Share Manager icon appears on your Desktop.
➣ Double-click the icon to run the program.
English - 103
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 103
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:15
Using the DLNA Application
The Program Screen Layout
1
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. Menus: The following application menus are provided : “File”, “Share”, “Server”, and “Help”.
2. Click to share the selected PC server folder (see page 106)
3. Click to cancel sharing (see page 106)
4. Click to refresh the PC folder and files.
5. Click to synchronize the share status (see page 107)
6. The folders and files of the PC to be shared are listed.
7. Folders shared by the user are listed.
English - 104
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 104
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:15
File
Property: Shows information on the selected file or folder.
Method 1: Select a file or folder and select the “File” menu and
then select the “Property” sub-menu.
Method 2: Select a file or folder, right-click over the selected file
or folder and then select “Property” from the pop-up
menu.
Exit: Exits the DLNA application.
If you select “Exit” without applying the changes after
changing the shared status, a message will appear asking
if you want to apply the changed settings to the PC. Select
“Yes” to apply the changes and exit the application.
English - 105
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 105
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:15
Share
Sharing a Folder
You can share a folder from your PC to the TV.
The maximum number of folders that can be shared is 32.
➣ Your PC will operate as a server to the TV.
Method 1: Select a folder in “My Computer”, select the “Share”
menu and then select the “Share Folder” sub-menu.
Method 2: Select a folder in “My Computer”, right-click over the
selected folder and then select “Share Folder” from
the pop-up menu.
Method 3: Locate the mouse pointer over a folder in the “My
Computer” folder list in the left pane and drag&drop
the folder into the Shared Folders pane. If a message
appears asking you to confirm the shared folder,
select “Yes”.
Cancelling a Shared Folder
You can cancel a shared folder on your PC. Select a folder from
the “Shared Folder” pane and select “Unshare Folder”.
Method 1: Select a folder from the “Shared Folder” pane, select
the “Share” menu and then select “Unshare Folder”.
Method 2: Select a folder from the “Shared Folder” pane,
right-click over the selected folder and then select
“Unshare Folder” from the pop-up menu.
Method 3: Locate the mouse pointer over a folder in the “Shared
Folder” pane and drag&drop the folder into the “My
Computer” pane. If a message appears asking you to
confirm the cancelation, select “Yes”.
English - 106
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 106
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:16
Applying the Current Settings
Perform this when synchronization is necessary due to a new
shared folder or canceling a shared folder. The “Set Changed
State” menu applies changes to shared folders to the data
saved with the PC share program.
Since applying changes to the internal data is a time-consuming
process, this function enables users to apply changes to the
data only when required.
Until the “Set Changed State” menu is selected, the changed
state of the shared folder is not applied to the server.
Changes to the shared folders are not applied to your PC until
you select the “Set Changed State” menu.
Method 1: Select the “Share” menu and select the “Refresh DB”
sub-menu.
Method 2: Click the “Set Changed State” icon.
Setting the Access Permission
To enable the TV to find your PC, the TV must be set to “Set
Device Policy” in the Access Permission Settings window. In
addition, the PC server and the TV must be on the same subnet.
Method: Select the “Share” menu and select “Set Device
Policy”.
➣ Rejected items are represented in gray.
➣ You can change the access permissions by using the
Allow “Accept”/”Deny” button.
➣ To delete an item, select the item and select “Delete
Item”.
English - 107
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 107
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:16
Server
Server
You can run or stop using your PC as a server.
Start Server at Windows start
You can determine whether to start the PC server automatically
when Windows starts.
Change server name
You can rename the PC server. Enter a new name and click “OK”.
The new name will appear at the top right of the window and will
appear on the TV.
Help
Version
The program version information message box appears.
English - 108
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 108
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:16
Using the DLNA Function
Using the DLNA Menu
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)
enables content saved on a DLNA server
(usually your PC) connected to your TV or
over a network to be played.
Wiselink Pro enables playing content
saved on a USB memory device connected
to the TV, while DLNA enables playing
content saved on a DLNA server (your PC)
connected to your TV or over the network.
The procedures to use the content are the
same as those for WISELINK Pro.
➣ If you install the PC share manager
program supplied with the TV onto a PC,
you can have the PC perform the role of a
DLNA server over the network.
PC
TV
LAN
LAN
External Modem
(ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV)
1. Press the W.LINK button on the remote control to display the “DLNA”
menu.
WISELINK Pro
DLNA : Server
PHOTO
2. Press the ◄ or ►button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup),
then press the ENTER
button.
➣ To exit “DLNA” mode, press the W.LINK button on the remote control.
Photo
Music
Movie
Server
Photo
♦ Photo List
– Sorting Photo List: Refer to page 78
– Viewing the Information: Refer to page 82
– Rotating the Photo file: Refer to page 81
– Viewing a Slide Show: Refer to page 83
Setup
 Device
e Exit
Photo
Image001.jpg
♦ During a Slide Show
– Play & Pause: Refer to page 83
– Slide Show Speed: Refer to page 85
– Zoom: Refer to page 85
– Rotate: Refer to page 84
➣ If the user has rotated the photo, the orientation of the photo will return
to its original state when the user exits the DLNA application or exits
WISELINK Pro mode.
Preference
Monthly
★★★
Jan
Nov
▲
Timeline
Server
 Device
 Select
Jump
Option
Music
♦ Music List
– Sorting Music List: Refer to page 88
– Viewing the Information: Refer to page 91
– Playing a music file: Refer to page 92
Music
Thanks
♦ While Playing a Music File
– Play & Pause: Refer to page 93
– Repeat Mode: Refer to page 93
Catherine
Album 1
2005
Pop
Album 2
2005
Pop
Album 3
2005
Pop
Preference
Artist
Server
Better than yesterday
Darby
Energetic
Title
I Love You
Jee
★★★
Sad
F
G
H
★★★
I
▲
 Device
J
L
 Select
Calm
P
★★★
S
Jump
T
V
Option
English - 109
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 109
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:17
Movie
Movie
ABC.avi
♦ Movie List
– Sorting Movie List: Refer to page 95
– Viewing the Information: Refer to page 97
– Playing a Movie file: Refer to page 98
♦ While Playing a Movie File
– Play & Pause: Refer to page 99
– Repeat Mode: Refer to page 99
★★★
Preference
Title
ENG
□
Timeline
Server
Setup
–
–
–
–
–
SYMBOL
A
M
▲
 Device
 Select
Jump
Option
Setup
Slide Show Speed: Refer to page 101
Music Repeat Mode: Refer to page 101
Movie Repeat Mode: Refer to page 101
Screen Saver Run Time: Refer to page 101
Information: Refer to page 101
Slide Show Speed
◄ Normal ►
Music Repeat Mode
:
Movie Repeat Mode
:
Screen Saver Run Time :
On
On
5 min
Information
Server
 Device
Move
Adjust
Return
➣ DLNA does not support the following functions.
– The Background Music and Background Music Setting functions.
– Sorting files by preference in the Photo, Music, and Movie folders.
– The Change Group Info function.
– The Delete function.
– The Safe Remove function.
– The REW/FF ( / ) key functions while a movie is playing.
– Function to watch continuously when playing movie.
➣ The Skip (◄/► keys) or Pause function may not work while a movie
is playing for the DLNA of other manufacturers, depending on the
corresponding content information.
➣ The playing time may not be displayed while a movie is playing.
English - 110
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 110
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:18
Content Library
Using the Content Library
Application
The “Content Library” enables you to view or play the built-in contents on the TV or stored on your USB device.
➣ The Delete, Move and Update functions will not work with the built-in content on the TV.
Using the Content Library Menu
1.Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Application”,
WISELINK Pro
then press the ENTER
button.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Content Library”, then press the
Content Library
ENTER
button.
InfoLink
➣ The “Content Library” main menu is displayed.
Product Guide
O Press the CONTENT button on the remote control to display the “Content
Library” menu.
3.Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Gallery, Cooking, Game,
Children, Fitness), then press the ENTER
button.
➣ To return to TV mode, press the CH / button on the remote control.
➣ If you press the Volume or MUTE button, no OSD is displayed, but the
function operates accordingly.
SET
Content Library
Gallery
Gallery
Cooking
Using the Remote Control Button in Content Library Menu
Button
Move the cursor and select an item.
ENTER
Select the currently selected item.
EXIT
CH /
PRE.CH / FAV.CH /
CH.LIST
Color button
VOL
/
CONTENT
Game
 Setup
Children
 USB
Fitness
R Return
e Exit
Operations
Wheel
(▲/▼/◄/►)
RETURN
RESET
Return to the previous menu.
Stop the current function and return to the “Content Library” main menu.
Stop Content Library mode and Returns to TV mode.
Keys that provide functions are described on the corresponding page.
You can control the volume of the played content.
Exit Content Library mode.
English - 111
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 111
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:19
Using the TV Memory Contents
The built-in contents of the “Content Library” are composed of the following sub-categories: “Gallery”, “Cooking”, “Game”,
“Children”, and “Fitness”.
Gallery
This function plays a SlideShow with high resolution images and background music
and produces various atmospheres.
Using the Gallery function of the TV, you can change your home atmosphere.
Content Library
Gallery
1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Gallery” in the “Content Library” main
menu.
Then press the ENTER
button.
Gallery
Cooking
Game
 Setup
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Art”, “Relaxation” or “Party”, then press
the ENTER
button.
➣ The selected slide show is played.
➣ There is default music for each for the “Art”, “Relaxation”, and “Party”
options.
Children
 USB
Fitness
R Return
e Exit
Gallery
Art
Relaxation
3. Press the yellow button to playback all images.
➣ To return to “Content Library” main menu, press the EXIT button.
➣ To exit “Content Library” mode, press the CH / button on the remote control.
Party
 Play All
R Return
e Exit
• Art: You can view masterpieces of the impressionists including Van
Gogh, Monet, Degas, Cezanne, etc.
• Relaxation: You can view beautiful and serene images of nature.
• Party: You can view images that can produce a cheerful and
exciting atmosphere.
➣ The copyrights of the “Gallery” contents and all issues related to them are reserved by Gallery Player, Inc.
➣ For additional “Gallery” contents, check for information through www.samsung.com. Please refer to the “Using
Additional Content Using External USB Memory Storage” section (page 117) to see how to play additional imagery.
CONTENT LIBRARY CONTAINS TEXT, GRAPHICS, IMAGES, MULTIMEDIA, AND OTHER MATERIALS FOR INFORMATIONAL AND
PROMOTIONAL PURPOSES ONLY. MATERIALS IN CONTENT LIBRARY HAS BEEN MODIFIED AND KEEPS BEING REVISED AND
UPDATED. THE MATERIALS IN THE CONTENT LIBRARY MAY NOT BE SUITABLE FOR ALL AUDIENCES.
INFORMATION IN THE CONTENT LIBRARY IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” ALTHOUGH THE INFORMATION PROVIDED TO YOU IN THE
CONTENT LIBRARY IS OBTAINED OR COMPLIED FROM SOURCES WE BELIEVE TO BE RELIABLE, SAMSUNG CANNOT AND
DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY INFORMATION OR DATA MADE
AVAILABLE TO YOU FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL
SAMSUNG BE HELD LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF, OR
IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR THE USE OF, THE CONTENT LIBRARY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
English - 112
BN68-01691A-Eng_2.indd 112
2008-07-24 �� 12:32:55
Cooking
You can view various recipes that you can then easily follow step by step. Enjoy these contents which give you great ideas for
meals.
1.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Cooking” in the “Content Library” main
menu.
Then press the ENTER
button.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Starters”, “Main Courses” or “Dessert”,
then press the ENTER
button.
• Starters: Selection of light meals and starters to bring your appetite.
• Main Courses: Most popular recipes of Chicken, Seafood,
Vegetables, and Grill.
• Desserts: Wide choice of sweet treats and fancy beverages.
➣ The recipes introduced in the “Cooking” contents on the Samsung TV
are based on recipes published by Anness Publishing.
➣ The copyrights of the “Cooking” contents and all issues related to them
are reserved by Practical Pictures.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a particular item.
Press the ENTER
button.
4. Press the ▲,▼, ◄ or ► button to select a recipe you want to use.
Then press the ENTER
button.
Content Library
Cooking
Gallery
Cooking
Game
 Setup
Children
 USB
Fitness
R Return
e Exit
Cooking
Starters
Main Courses
Desserts
R Return
e Exit
R Return
e Exit
Cooking > Starters
Sandwich
Salads
Soups & Appetizers
5. Press the ▲,▼, ◄ or ► button to use a recipe.
➣ To return to “Content Library” main menu, press the EXIT button.
➣ To exit “Content Library” mode, press the CH / button on the
remote control.
English - 113
BN68-01691A-Eng_2.indd 113
2008-07-24 �� 12:32:56
Game
This category provides entertainment games for the whole family.
Content Library
1.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Game” in the “Content Library” main
menu.
Then press the ENTER
button.
Game
Gallery
Cooking
Game
 Setup
Children
 USB
Fitness
R Return
e Exit
Game
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Dynamic Bowling”, “Minimini Cook”,
“Mini Game Pack”, “IQ Academy” or “Sudoku+”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ For the buttons used in the games, refer to the directions on the
screen.
➣ To return to “Content Library” main menu, press the EXIT button.
➣ To exit “Content Library” mode, press the CH / button on the
remote control.
Dynamic Bowling
Minimini Cook
Mini Game Pack
IQ Academy
Sudoku +
T
T
T
R Return
e Exit
• Dynamic Bowling: A realistic bowling game enjoyable on your TV. To achieve victory select the best position and
power that enables you to hit a strike.
• Minimini Cook: A cooking game that allows you to cook delicious foods. If you play all the mini-games for each
type of food, the food is completely cooked and a customer character eats the food. The greater
the number of failures during the mini-games, the worse the reaction displayed by the customer
character. If you avoid failure completely, the customer character eats your finished food!
• Mini Game Pack: This is a collection of one-button games that you can play with the ENTER
button only. Since
operating the game is easy, the whole family can enjoy this game. Each game will give you a
different delight.
• IQ Academy: A brain training game the whole family can enjoy. This game improves your power to think fast,
memorize and calculate by letting you solve problems within a specified time. The problems start
at the elementary school level. You have to take examinations whenever your score exceeds the
threshold. If you pass the examination, you change to a higher grade. If you graduate from university,
you have completed the game.
• Sudoku+: Now you can enjoy world-famous Sudoku (Magic Square) on the TV. The objective is to fill a 9×9 grid so
that each column, each row, and each of the nine 3×3 boxes contains digits 1 to 9.
➣ For the 5 embedded games, the copyrights and all issues related to them are reserved bythe corresponding game
providers.
➣ More detail instructions on how to play a game is given at the beginning of each game page.
➣ Mini Game Pack, IQ Academy and Sudoku+ are trial versions. You can purchase a full version or additional games
at www.samsung.com or www.nurisam.com
Color Buttons for Games
Button
Red
Operations
Press to move to the game home screen
Green
Press to pause the game
Yellow
Option Key
Blue
Press to exit the game
English - 114
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 114
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:20
Children
This is educational and interactive content that children can watch repeatedly. Enjoy existing stories, songs and games with the
Boowa and Kwala characters.
1.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Children” in the “Content Library” main
menu.
Then press the ENTER
button.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Story”, “Song” or “Play”, then press the
ENTER
button.
• Story: You can watch storytelling content with the Boowa and
Kwala characters.
• Song: You can enjoy Sing Along content with the Boowa and Kwala
characters.
• Play: You can enjoy exciting and fun interactive games using the
remote control.
Content Library
Children
Gallery
Cooking
Game
 Setup
Children
 USB
Fitness
R Return
e Exit
Children
Story
Song
➣ The copyrights of the “Children” contents and issues related to them
are reserved by UpToTen.
Play
R Return
e Exit
R Return
e Exit
Children > Story
Scary Dinosaurs
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select an item to play. Press the ENTER
button.
The selected content is played.
➣ To return to “Content Library” main menu, press the EXIT button.
➣ To exit “Content Library” mode, press the CH / button on the
remote control.
Wonderful Circus
Mysterious Jungle
Huge Farms
Funny Dance
Icing Sugar
Cuddly Koalas
English - 115
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 115
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:21
Fitness
This is beneficial health management content that provides stretching and massage
exercises that can be enjoyed by the whole family.
Content Library
1.Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Fitness” in the “Content Library” main
menu.
Then press the ENTER
button.
Fitness
Gallery
Cooking
Game
 Setup
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Basic Stretches” or “Massage”, then
press the ENTER
button.
• Basic Stretches: Follow the stretching exercises provided by
detailed descriptions and slow motion images
step by step.
• Massage: Manage your health and release your stress through the
easy to follow massages.
Fitness
R Return
e Exit
Fitness
Basic Stretches
Massage
➣ The “Basic Stretches” contents for the Samsung TV are based on the
book Stretching by Suzanne Martin which is published by DK and the
“Massage” contents are based on the books published by Anness
Publishing.”
➣ The copyrights to “Basic Stretches” are reserved by the DK Publishing
Company. The copyrights to the “Massage” content are reserved by
Practical Pictures. All issues related to copyrights are reserved by the
corresponding company.
3. Press the ◄, ►, ▲ or ▼ button to select an item to view.
Press the ENTER
button.
➣ The “Basic Stretches” contents are automatically played so that
you can easily follow the movements on the screen. To move to
the previous or next operation, press the ◄ or ► button to view the
required step.
➣ The selected item is displayed on the screen.
➣ To return to “Content Library” main menu, press the EXIT button.
➣ To exit “Content Library” mode, press the CH / button on the
remote control.
Children
 USB
R Return
e Exit
Fitness > Basic Stretches
Head, Face and Eyes
Head to Toe
Neck
Posture Program
Shoulders
Stretching Routines
Arms and Hands
Chest and Ribcage
R Return
e Exit
Using the Remote Control Button in Fitness menu
Button
Operations
Wheel
(◄/►)
View to previous step / View to next step
ENTER
Play or pause (in Basic Stretches)
Setup
Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears.
1.Press the yellow button to select “Setup” in the “Content Library” main
menu.
2. Press the ◄ or ►button to select “Off”, “4 hour”, “8 hour”, “10 hour”.
Setup
Screen Saver Run Time ◄ 4 hour ►
Adjust
Return
e Exit
English - 116
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 116
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:21
Using Additional Content Using External USB Memory Storage
You can download contents onto a USB memory device and play them on your TV.
(The contents on the external USB device are played directly without being copied to the built-in Flash memory of the TV.)
Playing and Exiting New Content
1.
Press the Red button in the “Content Library” main menu.
➣ The USB Browser main screen is displayed.
➣ A list of files saved on the USB device is displayed.
2.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to the file (or folder) you want to play. Press
the ENTER
button.
➣ The selected content is played.
➣ The use of contents is the same as in using the TV memory contents.
➣ To return to the USB browser main screen, press the EXIT button.
To exit “Content Library” mode, press the CH / button on the remote
control.
➣ “Content Library” only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC).
MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of
MSC are Thumb drives and Flash Card Readers (Both USB HDD and
HUB are not supported.)
Playing a game using an external USB memory device will allow you to
save your game (depending on the game).
Take care as removing the USB memory device while saving data to the
USB memory device may cause the data to be lost.
Content Library
Gallery
Gallery
Cooking
Game
Children
 USB
Content Library
R Return
USB
Fitness
e Exit
<< 1/1 >>
Game
Cooking
Gallery
Fitness
Living
Fitness
Children
▼
 TV Memory
Downloading New Contents
New content other than the built-in contents will be provided via the Samsung.com
website with or without charge.
♦
♦
Downloading Content
1.
Visit the www.samsung.com website and open the Content Library
page.
2.
Enter the product number (UDN, Unique Device Number).
3.
Select a content item in the Contents Download page.
4.
Download the contents onto the USB memory device.
➣ “Content Library” only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices
(MSC). MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device.
Examples of MSC are Thumb drives and Flash Card Readers (Both
USB HDD and HUB are not supported.)
5.
Go to “Content Library” main menu by pressing “Contents” button or
choosing “Content Library” (MenuApplication”Content Library”)
6.
Plug the USB memory into USB port on the side of the TV.
USB > Game
▲
▲
R Return
<< 1/1 >>
Go to category
Bowling
Bowling
Action
FunnySoft 2006/12/21
17 MB
Start Bowling Game.
Minicook
Mini Game Pack
IQ Academy
Sudoku
▼
 TV Memory
 Show UDN
▲
R Return
Finding a product number (Unique Device Number, UDN)
1.
2.
3.
♦
Game
 Show UDN
Insert the USB memory into the USB port on the side of the TV.
In the USB Browser main screen, press the Green button (Show UDN).
The 18-digit number on the screen is the product code.
Provided Content
Additional contents are available on www.samsung.com
The Remote Control Buttons Used in the USB “Content Library”
Button
Red
Operations
Return to the main menu of the TV Memory “Content Library”.
Green
Show the product number (unique device number) of the TV used to download content from
the website.
EXIT
Stop the current function and return to the “Content Library” main menu.
CH / / PRE.CH /
FAV.CH / CH.LIST
Stop Content Library mode and Returns to TV mode.
English - 117
BN68-01691A-Eng_2.indd 117
2008-07-24 �� 12:33:19
Network Settings and InfoLink
To access Samsung’s Infolink network feature, you must make one of the connections on the following pages.
Network Connection - Cable
LAN Connection for a DHCP Environment
The procedures to set up the network using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) are described below. Since an
IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS are automatically allocated when DHCP is selected, you do not have to enter
them manually.
TV Rear Panel
The Modem Port
on the Wall
External Modem
(ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV)
LAN
1 Cable
2 Modem Cable
1.Connect the
[LAN] port on
the rear panel of
the TV and the
external modem
with a LAN Cable.
2.Connect the LAN
port on the wall
and the external
modem with a
Modem Cable.
You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router).
TV Rear Panel
IP Sharer
The Modem Port
on the Wall
External Modem
(ADSL/VDSL/
Cable TV)
LAN Cable
LAN Cable
Modem Cable
You can connect the LAN port and the TV directly depending on your network status.
TV Rear Panel
The LAN Port
on the Wall
LAN Cable
➣ The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer.
➣ If the IP address allocation by the DHCP server has failed, turn the external modem off, turn it on again after at least 10
seconds and then try again.
➣ For the connections between the external modem and the Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual of the
corresponding product.
➣ You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router)
➣ You cannot use a manual-connection-type ADSL modem because it does not support DHCP. You have to use an
automatic-connection-type ADSL modem.
English - 118
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 118
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:24
LAN Connection for Static IP Environment
The procedures to set up the network using a static IP address are described below. You have to manually enter the IP
address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS that are provided by your Internet Service Provider (ISP).
TV Rear Panel
The LAN Port
on the Wall
1.Connect the [LAN]
port on the rear
panel of the TV
and the LAN port
on the wall using
the LAN cable.
1 LAN Cable
You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router).
The LAN Port on
the Wall
LAN Cable
IP Sharer
TV Rear Panel
LAN Cable
➣ The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer.
➣ If you are using a static IP address, your ISP will inform you of the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS.
You must enter these values to complete the network settings. If you do not know the values, ask your network
administrator.
➣ For the information on how to configure and connect a Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual for the
corresponding product.
➣ You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router).
➣ If you use an IP Sharer (IP Router) that supports DHCP, you can set up the device as either DHCP or static IP.
➣ For the procedures to use a static IP address, ask your Internet Service Provider.
English - 119
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 119
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:25
Network Connection - Wireless
You can connect to the Samsung’s Infolink network wirelessly through a wireless IP sharer.
[LN46A850S1F, LN52A850S1F]
The LAN Port on
the Wall
Wireless IP sharer
1.Connect the Samsung
Infolink Wireless adapter
into the Wiselink terminal
of the TV.
TV Side Panel
Wireless LAN Adapter
for InfoLink
HDMI IN4
LAN Cable
[LN46A860S2F, LN52A860S2F]
The LAN Port on
the Wall
Wireless IP sharer
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
HDMI IN4
or
LAN Cable
➣
➣
TV Side Panel
Wireless LAN Adapter
for InfoLink
You must use the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter for InfoLink(WIS-08BG) to use a wireless network.
The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter for InfoLink is sold separately. Contact a Samsung Electronics agent or service
center for purchasing.
To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer.
If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, you TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless
network.
You must use a wireless IP sharer that supports IEEE 802.11 B or IEEE 802.11G.
If the wireless IP sharer allows you to turn on/off the Ping connection function, turn it on.
Set the wireless IP sharer to Infrastructure mode. Ad-hoc mode is not supported.
Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer
is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communications may fail.
When applying the security key for the AP (wireless IP sharer), only the following is supported.
• 1) Authentication Mode : WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
• 2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES
If you apply a security system other than the systems listed above, it will not work with the TV.
If connecting 2 Wireless LAN Adapters for InfoLink, the adaptor read at first is executed.
Network selection
Setup
Select Cable or Wireless as the method to connect to the Samsung’s Infolink network.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Network selection”, then press the
ENTER
button.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Cable” or “Wireless”, then press the
ENTER
button.
• Cable: Connect to Samsung’s Infolink network using a cable.
• Wireless: Connect to Samsung’s Infolink network wirelessly.
➣ The menu is activated only if the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter for
InfoLink is connected.
Language
: English
Time
Network selection : Cable
Cable
Cable Network Setup
►
Wireless
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
English - 120
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 120
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:27
Cable Network Setup
➣ First, the “Network selection” must be set to “Cable”. (See page 120)
Auto Setup
Setup
If you connect the LAN cable and it supports DHCP, the Internet Protocol (IP) Settings are automatically configured.
➣ Please check if the LAN cable is connected. (See page 118)
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
Time
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Cable Network Setup”, then press the
Network selection
: Cable
ENTER
button.
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
3. Press the ENTER
button to select “Internet Protocol Setup”.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The Internet Protocol is set automatically.
➣ Select “Network Test” to check the network connectivity.
(Refer to page 122)
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Cable Network Setup
Internet Protocol Setup : Auto
AutoSetup
Setup
Network Test Manual Setup
IP Address
:
0
0
0
0
Subnet Mask
:
0
0
0
0
Gateway
:
0
0
0
0
DNS Server
:
0
0
0
0
Move
Return
Enter
Manual Setup
Time
Network selection
Setup
To connect the TV to the LAN using a static IP address, you must set up the
Internet Protocol (IP).
➣ Please check if the LAN cable is connected. (See page 119)
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Cable Network Setup”, then press the
ENTER
button.
: Cable
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
3.Press the ENTER
button to select “Internet Protocol Setup”.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Manual Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
Cable Network Setup
Internet Protocol Setup : Auto
AutoSetup
Setup
Network Test Manual Setup
IP Address
:
0
0
0
0
Subnet Mask
:
0
0
0
0
Gateway
:
0
0
0
0
DNS Server
:
0
0
0
0
Move
5.Press the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move to an item, and press the numeric
button to configure the selected item. Press the ENTER
button.
➣ Select “Network Test” to check the network connectivity.
(Refer to page 122)
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Return
Enter
Cable Network Setup
Internet Protocol Setup : Manual Setup
Network Test
IP Address
:
0
0
0
0
Subnet Mask
:
0
0
0
0
Gateway
:
0
0
0
0
DNS Server
:
0
0
0
0
Move
~
Number
Enter
Return
English - 121
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 121
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:28
Network Test
You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network.
Network selection
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Cable Network Setup”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Time
: Cable
Cable Network Setup
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Cable Network Setup
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Network Test”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The current network settings will appear.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
When unable to connect to a wired network
1. If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the
device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates
the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet, your TV may not
be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of
the device (PC) used to connect to the Internet the first time. In this case,
ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices
other than your PC (such as your TV) to the Internet.
2. If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password to connect to
the Internet (network), your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet.
In this case, you have to enter your ID or password when connecting to the
Internet using an Internet Sharer (Router).
3. The internet connection may fail due to a firewall problem. In this case,
contact your Internet service provider.
If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures
of your Internet service provider, please contact a Samsung Electronics
Service Center.
Internet Protocol Setup : Auto Setup
Network Test
►
IP Address
:
0
0
0
0
Subnet Mask
:
0
0
0
0
Gateway
:
0
0
0
0
DNS Server
:
0
0
0
0
Move
Enter
Return
Network Test
MAC Address (00:12:34:56:78:90)
IP Address, Subnet, Gateway, DNS Server
Gateway Ping
Domain Ping
Your network is operating properly. If you still have a
network problem, contact your network service
provider.
Return
English - 122
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 122
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:28
Wireless Network Setup
➣ The menu is activated only if the Samsung Infolink Wireless adapter is connected. (See page 120)
Auto Setup
Network selection
: Wireless
Cable Network Setup
Setup
➣ If you connect the LAN cable and it supports DHCP, the Internet Protocol (IP)
Settings are automatically configured.
➣ The wireless IP sharer to be connected to this product must support DHCP.
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Wireless Network Setup”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
Wireless Network Setup
Internet Protocol Setup : Auto
AutoSetup
Setup
Network Test
3. Press the ENTER
button to select “Internet Protocol Setup”.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The Internet Protocol is set automatically.
➣ Select “Access Point Select” to check the network connectivity.
(Refer to page 124)
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Manual Setup
Access Point Select
: AP1
IP Address
:
0
0
0
0
Subnet Mask
:
0
0
0
0
Gateway
:
0
0
0
0
DNS Server
:
0
0
0
Move
0
Return
Enter
Manual Setup
Network selection
: Wireless
Cable Network Setup
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Wireless Network Setup”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
3.Press the ENTER
button to select “Internet Protocol Setup”.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Manual Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
5.Press the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move to an item, and press the numeric
button to configure the selected item. Press the ENTER
button.
➣ If you want to use a static IP address, refer to the user manual of your
wireless IP sharer.
➣ Select “Access Point Select” to check the network connectivity. (Refer to
page 124)
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Wireless Network Setup
Internet Protocol Setup : Auto
AutoSetup
Setup
Network Test
Manual Setup
Access Point Select
: AP1
IP Address
:
0
0
0
0
Subnet Mask
:
0
0
0
0
Gateway
:
0
0
0
0
DNS Server
:
0
0
0
0
Move
Return
Enter
Wireless Network Setup
Internet Protocol Setup : Manual Setup
Network Test
Access Point Select
: AP1
IP Address
:
0
0
0
0
Subnet Mask
:
0
0
0
0
Gateway
:
0
0
0
0
DNS Server
:
0
0
0
Move
~
Number
Enter
0
Return
English - 123
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 123
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:28
Access Point Select
You can select the IP sharer to use when using a wireless network.
Network selection
: Wireless
Cable Network Setup
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Wireless Network Setup”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Access Point Select”, then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ The wireless Access Points that exist in you area are searched and
displayed in the Access Point List.
Wireless Network Setup
Internet Protocol Setup : Auto Setup
Network Test
Access Point Select
: AP 1
IP Address
:
0
0
0
0
Subnet Mask
:
0
0
0
0
Gateway
:
0
0
0
0
DNS Server
:
0
0
0
0
Move
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the Access Point to use. Then press the
ENTER
button.
➣ If a wireless Access Point is not in the Access Point list, press the Red
button.
➣ When the connection is made, you will be returned to the screen
automatically.
➣ If you selected an Access Point that requires security authentication, enter
the security key.
➣ You can enter up to characters for a security key.]
➣ The character set may differ and the red button may not appear
depending on the Access Point.
►
Return
Enter
Wireless Network Setup
Access Point Select
1/5
AP 1
AP 2
WEP
AP 3

AP 4
Search
Return
Select
Move
Wireless Network Setup
Securty Key
A
B
_
C
D
E
0~9
F
Number
Delete
Done
➣ If you have selected an Access Point with a security authentication:
- The Security Key input screen appears.
- Enter the security key and press the ENTER
button.
- Using the Remote Control Buttons on the Security Key Input Screen
Button
Wheel
(▲/▼/◄/►)
ENTER
RED
GREEN
BLUE
Move
Select
1~ 9 Number
Return
Wireless Network Setup
Access Point Select
1/5
0016018F0176
Connected.
Access Point Name : AP1
Operations
ALKO_AP
Moves the selection up/down/left/right.
Enters (Inputs) the selected character.
Switch between Upper- and Lower-Case
Letters
You can delete an already entered
character.
Press this button to finish entering the
security key.
WEP
NESPOTOK

Search
AP4
Move
Select
Return
English - 124
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 124
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:29
Network Test
You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network.
Network selection
: Wireless
Cable Network Setup
Setup
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Wireless Network Setup”, then press the
ENTER
button.
Wireless Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Network Test”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The current network settings will appear.
➣ If no “Access Point Select” is set up, the test cannot be completed. (See
page 124)
Press the EXIT button to exit.
When unable to connect to a wireless network
1. Your TV may fail to locate an AP that is configured as a private SSID type.
In this case, please change the AP settings and try again.
2. If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the
device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates
the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet, your TV may not
be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of
the device (PC) used to connect to the Internet the first time. In this case,
ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices
other than your PC (such as your TV) to the Internet.
If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures
of your Internet service provider, please contact 1-800-SAMSUNG.
Wireless Network Setup
Internet Protocol Setup : Auto Setup
Network Test
Access Point Select
: AP1
IP Address
:
0
0
0
0
Subnet Mask
:
0
0
0
0
Gateway
:
0
0
0
0
DNS Server
:
0
0
0
Move
Enter
0
Return
Network Test
MAC Address (00:12:34:56:78:90)
IP Address, Subnet, Gateway, DNS Server
Gateway Ping
Domain Ping
Your network is operating properly. If you still have
a network problem, contact your network service
provider.
Return
English - 125
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 125
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:29
TV
VCR
DVD
STB
Using InfoLink
You can view news, stock market and weather information services using SAMSUNG’s InfoLink service.
➣ Set up the network. (Refer to pages 118~125)
Activating InfoLink
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Application
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Application”, then press the ENTER
button.
Content Library
InfoLink
Product Guide
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “InfoLink”, then press the ENTER
button.
ress the ◄ or ► button to select a service (“Weather”, “News”, “Stocks” or
3. P
“Setup”) and press the ENTER
button.
➣ You can select and view more than one service at the same time only for
‘News (without detailed information)’, ‘Weather-Today’s Weather’, and
‘Stocks-Favorite Stocks, Market Summary’.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
Weather
Move
Return
O Press the INFO.L button on the remote control to display the “InfoLink” menu.
ALL THE MATERIALS AVAILABLE THROUGH INFOLINK [“INFOLINK CONTENT’] ARE THE PROPERTY OF THE ORIGINATOR
OF THE CONTENT [“CONTENT OWNER’] AND/OR ITS AFFILIATES OR LICENSORS, AND ARE PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT,
SET
TRADEMARK, AND OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY LAWS. ALL INFOLINK CONTENT IS PROVIDED SOLELY
FORRESET
YOUR
PERSONAL NONCOMMERCIAL USE. YOU MAY NOT USE ANY INFOLINK CONTENT IN A MANNER THAT CONSTITUTES AN
INFRINGEMENT OF THE CONTENT OWNERS’ RIGHTS OR THAT HAS NOT BEEN AUTHORIZED BY THE CONTENT OWNER.
MORE SPECIFICALLY, UNLESS EXPLICITLY AUTHORIZED IN THIS DISCLAIMER OR BY THE CONTENT OWNER, YOU MAY NOT
MODIFY, COPY, REPRODUCE, REPUBLISH, UPLOAD, POST, TRANSMIT, TRANSLATE, SELL, CREATE DERIVATIVE WORKS,
EXPLOIT, OR DISTRIBUTE IN ANY MANNER OR MEDIUM (INCLUDING BY EMAIL OR OTHER ELECTRONIC MEANS) ANY
INFOLINK CONTENT OR ANY OTHER MATERIAL FROM THE INFOLINK SERVICE. CONTENT PROVIDED CONTENT OWNERS IN
CONNECTION WITH THE INFOLINK SERVICE MAY BE TIME-DELAYED AS SPECIFIED BY THE CONTENT OWNER AND/OR ITS
AFFILIATES.
INFOLINK IS PROVIDED THROUGH AGREEMENT BETWEEN SAMSUNG AND THE CONTENT OWNER. INFOLINK MAY
BE TERMINATED OR INTERUPTED AT ANY TIME BY EITHER SAMSUNG OR THE CONTENT PROVIDER OR THROUGH
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN THEM. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL
SAMSUNG OR THE CONTENT PROVIDER BE HELD LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, SUCH TERMINATION OR INTERUPTION. SINCE
CONTENT TRANSMITTED VIA INFOLINK IS RECEIVED BY MEANS OF NETWORKS AND TRANSMISSION FACILITIES OVER
WHICH SAMSUNG HAS NO CONTROL, SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY
INTERRUPTION OR SUSPENSION OF INTERLINK SERVICE OR FOR THE ABSENCE OF CONTENT RESULTING THEREFROM.
INFORMATION IN THE INFOLINK IS PROVIDED “AS IS,”AND CONSEQUENTLY, SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT THE
INFORMATION SO PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE; AND SAMSUNG
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS,
LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY INFORMATION OR DATA MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH INFOLINK FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD LIABLE,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF INFOLINK BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
English - 126
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 126
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:31
Using the Weather Service
1.Press the INFO.L button on the remote control.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to move to the “Weather” service and press the
ENTER
button.
Weather
Set up the Region
3.Press Yellow button. Input the postal (zip) code of the region by pressing the
number buttons on the remote, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ You can check the weather of the selected region.
Washington
59°F
Options
Set up Weather Option
4.Press the Red button while using the service to change the “Weather” service
option.
5.Press ▲ or ▼ button and select “Weather” option.
Return
Move
Weather
Zip
Close
Return
Move
Options
Today’s Weather
Weekly Forecast
➣ To exit the ”Weather” service, press the Blue button.
➣ To exit the “InfoLink” service, press the EXIT button.
Select
Return
Washington
59°F
Using the News Service
➣ The news provider may be changed in the future.
1.Press the INFO.L button on the remote control.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to move to the “News” service and press the
ENTER
button.
button to view the detailed article.
➣ Press the ENTER
➣ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to view the previous or next article.
News
Move
Return
GM turns 100 with focus on future
Enter ● Options ● Close
3.Press the Red button while using the service to change the “News” service
Option.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ button and select “News” service option.
➣ The News service option changes depending on the provided web service.
➣ To exit the ”News” service, press the Blue button.
➣ To exit the “InfoLink” service, press the EXIT button.
News
Move
Return
Options
Politics
Money
World
News
Life
Sports
Select
Return
GM turns 100 with focus on future
English - 127
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 127
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:33
Using the Stock Service
1.Press the INFO.L button on the remote control.
2.Press the ◄ or ► button to move to the “Stocks” service and press the
ENTER
button.
Stocks
No Favorite Stocks
Return
Move
Quotes delayed at least 15 minutes.
Data provided by interastive Data.
Options
3.Press the Red button while using the service to change the “Stocks” service
option.
4.Press ▲ or ▼ button and select “Stocks” service option, then press the
ENTER
button.
Options
Stocks
Return
Move
• Favorite Stocks: The Favorite stock information is displayed. You can
set up the Favorite Stocks by pressing the Yellow button.
• Market Summary: Dow Jones, Nasdaq and S&P 500 are toggled and
the entire index, amount of up or down, and % are displayed.
• Stocks & News: The Favorite stock information and Dow Jones,
NASDAQ and S&P 500 index and Financial news are displayed.
Favorite Stocks
Market Summary
Stocks & News
Select
Return
Favorite
Close
No Favorite Stocks
Quotes delayed at least 15 minutes.
Data provided by interastive Data.
➣ Stock quotes delayed at least 15 minutes.
➣ To exit the “Stocks” service, press the Blue button.
➣ To exit the “InfoLink” service, press the EXIT button.
Setting Favorite Stocks Items
1. Press the Yellow button when “Favorite Stocks” or “Stocks & News” is
selected. The Set Favorite Stocks screen appears.
2.Press the ◄ button to move to the Category. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to
select a Category. Press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a stock item and press the ENTER
button.
➣ The selected stock is set as a Favorite Stock.
➣ The mark will appear to the left of the stock name.
➣ Press the ENTER
button again to cancel the setting. The mark will
disappear.
➣ To cancel all selections, press the Green button.
➣ Pressing the Red button toggles between NYSE and NASDAQ.
4.To finish the settings, press the RETURN button.
Options
Stocks
Return
Move
Favorite Stocks
Market Summary
Stocks & News
Select
Return
No Favorite Stocks
Quotes delayed at least 15 minutes.
Data provided by interastive Data.
Set Favorite Stocks
NYSE
3/1844
▲
A - B
A
AGILENT TECHNOLGIES, INC.
C - E
AA
ALCOA INC.
F - H
AAI
AIRTRAN HOLDING, INC
I - K
AAR
AMR CORPORATION
L - N
AAB
ABB ASEA BROWN BOVERI LT..
● NASDAQ
● Reset
Move
Select
▼
Return
English - 128
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 128
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:35
InfoLink Setup
1.Press the INFO.L button on the remote control.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option. (“Auto Launch”,
“Display Time”, “Font Size”, “Background Color”, “InfoLink’s Position”)
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select an option, then press the ENTER
Setup
Move
Return
InfoLink’s Setup
button.
• Auto Launch: Determines whether to launch InfoLink automatically
when the TV is turned on. You can select either “Off” or “On”.
• Display Time: Determines the time to display the news service on
the TV screen. You can select “4 Hours”, “8 Hours”, “10 Hours”, or
“Always”.
• Font Size: You can select letter size “Standard” or “Large” through
InfoLink service.
• Background Color: You can select the Background Color of InfoLink
service. The color is applied to each service, option and setup window.
• InfoLink’s Position: You can set the position of each InfoLink service
on the screen. You can select from six preset InfoLink positions
(“Position 1”~“Position 6”).
Auto Launch
: Off
Display Time
: 4 Hours
Font Size
: Standard
Background Color
: Black
InfoLink’s Position
Move
Select
Return
➣ To exit the “Setup” service, press the RETURN button.
➣ To exit the “InfoLink” service, press the EXIT button.
InfoLink’s Position
Weather
Stocks
Weather
News
Stocks
News
Position 1
News
Position 4
Stocks
Position 2
Weather
Position 3
Weather
Stocks
Weather
News
Stocks
News
Position 5
News
Stocks
Weather
Position 6
English - 129
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 129
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:37
Product Guide
Application
The Product Guide gives you information on the most important features of this TV.
1.Press the MENU button to display the menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Application”, then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Product Guide”, then press the ENTER
button.
Content Library
InfoLink
Product Guide
3. P
ress the ◄ or ► button to select a Guide (“Picture Quality”,
“Entertainment” or “Connectivity”) and press the ENTER
button.
4.You can navigate the Product Guide screen by using the ◄ and ► buttons.
Picture Quality
Full HD 1080p
Auto Motion Plus 120 Hz
Entertainment
InfoLink
Content Library
Entertainment Mode
Connectivity
WISELINK Pro
DLNA
4HDMI
Anynet+
6. Press the EXIT button to exit.
Using the Remote Control Button in Product Guide Menu
Button
Yellow Button
Wheel
(◄/►)
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
CH
/
PRE.CH / FAV.CH
Operations
Shows the contents of the Product Guide sequentially. (AutoPlay)
Move the cursor and select an item.
Select the currently selected item.
Return to the previous menu.
Stop the current function and return to the “Product Guide” main menu.
Stop Product Guide mode and Returns to TV mode
English - 130
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 130
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:37
About Anynet+
What is Anynet+?
Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung
TV’s remote.
Connecting Anynet+ Devices
The Anynet+ system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung
device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it.
To connect to a TV
TV Rear Panel
Anynet+ Device 1
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Anynet+ Device 2
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Anynet+ Device 3
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Anynet+ Device 4
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Connect the [HDMI 1], [HDMI 2], [HDMI 3] or [HDMI 4] jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+
device using an HDMI cable.
To connect to Home Theater
TV Rear Panel
Anynet+ Device 1
HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Anynet+ Device 3
Home Theater
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Anynet+ Device 2
Anynet+ Device 4
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Optical Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable
1. C
onnect the
[HDMI 1], [HDMI
2], [HDMI 3] or
[HDMI 4] jack on
the TV and the
HDMI OUT jack of
the corresponding
Anynet+ device
using an HDMI
cable.
2. C
onnect the
HDMI IN jack of
the home theater
and the HDMI
OUT jack of the
corresponding
Anynet+ device
using an HDMI
cable.
➣ Connect the Optical cable between the Digital Audio Out (Optical) jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the
Home Theater.
➣ When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio. You will only hear sound from
the Home Theater’s Front Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD/Blu-Ray player or Cable/Satellite Box (ie Anynet Device 1 or 2)
directly to the Amplifier or Home Theater, not the TV.
➣ Connect only one Home Theater.
➣ You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI 1.3 cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions.
➣ Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the Standby or On status.
➣ Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type.
English - 131
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 131
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:38
Setting Up Anynet+
The following settings help set the Anynet+ functions.
To use the Anynet+ Function, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) must be set to On
WISELINK Pro
Application
1.Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Application”,
then press the ENTER
button.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)”, then press the
ENTER
button.
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
4.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)”, then press the
ENTER
button.
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “On”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)” function is enabled.
➣ If you select Off, “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)” is disabled.
➣ When the “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)” function is disabled, all the Anynet+
related operations are deactivated.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Content Library
InfoLink
Product Guide
Device List
Setup
Move
Enter
Return
Enter
Return
Enter
Return
Setup
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
: ON
Auto Turn Off
: Yes
Off
On
Move
Setting an Anynet+ Device to turn Off Automatically when the TV is Turned Off
1.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Turn Off”, then press the ENTER
button.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Yes”, then press the ENTER
button.
➣ The “Auto Turn Off” function is enabled.
➣ If you select “No”, the “Auto Turn Off” function is canceled.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ The active source on the TV remote must be set to TV to use the Anynet+
function.
➣ If you set “Auto Turn Off” to “Yes”, connected external devices are also turned
off when the TV is turned off. If an external device is still recording, it may or
may not turn off.
Easy Setting
1.Press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2.Press the ENTER
button to select “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)”.
➣ The Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) menus appear on the screen.
Setup
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
: ON
Auto Turn Off
: Yes
No
Yes
Move
Tools
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Multi-Track Sound :
Stereo
Picture Size : 16:9
Picture Mode
:
Standard
Sound Mode
:
Custom
Sleep Timer
:
Off
Add to Favorite
Switch to Cable
Move
Enter
e Exit
English - 132
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 132
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:39
Scanning and Switching between Anynet+ Devices
1.Press the TOOLS button.
Press the ENTER
button to select “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)”.
View TV
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Device List”, then press the ENTER
Device List
button.
Recording: DVDR
➣ Anynet+ devices connected to the TV are listed.
If you cannot find a device you want, press the red button to scan for
DVDR Operation
devices.
Receiver
:
On
➣ Only when you set “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)” to On in the “Setup” menu, the
Setup
“Device List” menu appears.
Move
Enter
Return
3.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select to a particular device and press the
ENTER
button. It is switched to the selected device.
➣ Switching to the selected devices may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the operation during the switching
operation.
➣ The time required to scan for devices is determined by the number of connected devices.
➣ When the device scan is complete, the number of devices found are not displayed.
➣ Although the TV automatically searches the device list when the TV is turned on via the power button, devices
connected to the TV when the TV is on or under some conditions are not automatically displayed in the device list.
Press the red button to search for the connected device.
➣ If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make
sure to switch to an Anynet+ device by using the “Device List”
Anynet+ Menu
The Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices connected to the TV.
Anynet+ Menu
Description
View TV
Device List
Anynet+ mode changes to TV broadcast mode.
(device_name) Menu
Shows the connected device menus.
E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the disc menu of the DVD recorder will appear.
(device_name) Operation
Shows the play menu of the connected device.
E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the play menu of the DVD recorder will appear.
Record: (*recorder)
Starts recording immediately using the recorder. (This is only available for devices that
support the recording function.)
(*recorder) Reserve Recording
Enables reserving a recording for the recorder. (This is only available for devices that
support the recording reservation function.)
Stop Recording: (*recorder)
Receiver
Stops recording.
Shows the Anynet+ device list.
Sound is played through the receiver.
➣ If more than one recording device is connected, they are displayed as (*recorder) and if only one recording device is
connected, it will be represented as (*device_name).
TV Remote Control Buttons Available in Anynet+ Mode
Device Type
Operating Status
Anynet+ Device
After switching to the device, when the
menu of the corresponding device is
displayed on the screen.
Available Buttons
Numeric buttons
▲/▼/◄/►/ENTER
buttons
Color buttons / EXIT button
(Backward search) /
(Stop) /
(Play) /
After switching to the device, while
playing a file
Device with built-in Tuner
Audio Device
After switching to the device, when you
are watching a TV program
When Receiver is activated
CH
/ CH
(Forward search)
(Pause)
button
VOL – / VOL + / MUTE button
➣ The Anynet+ function only works when the active source on the TV remote control is set to TV.
➣ The
button works only while in the recordable state.
➣ You cannot control Anynet+ devices using the buttons on the TV. You can control Anynet+ devices only using the TV
remote control.
➣ The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. In this case, reselect the Anynet+ device.
➣ The Anynet+ functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products.
➣ The
,
operations may differ depending on the device.
English - 133
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 133
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:39
Recording
You can make a recording of a TV program using a Samsung recorder.
1.Press the TOOLS button.
Press the ENTER
button to select “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)”.
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Recording: (device_name)”, then press
the ENTER
button. Recording begins.
When there is more than one recording device
When multiple recording devices are connected, the recording devices are
listed. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a recording device and press the
ENTER
button. Recording begins.
View TV
Device List
Recording: DVDR
DVDR Operation
Receiver
:
On
Setup
Move
Enter
Return
When the recording device is not displayed
Select “Device List” and press the red button to search devices.
Press the EXIT button to exit.
➣ You can record the source streams by selecting “Recording: (device_name)”.
➣ Pressing the
button will record whatever you are currently watching. If you are watching video from another
device, the video from the device is recorded.
➣ Before recording, check whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the recording device. To properly connect
an antenna to a recording device, refer to the recording device’s users manual.
Listening through a Receiver (Home theater)
You can listen to sound through a receiver instead of the TV speaker.
1.Press the TOOLS button.
View TV
Press the ENTER
button to select “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)”.
Device List
2.Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Receiver”.
Recording: DVDR
Press the ◄ or ► button to select “On” or “Off”.
DVDR Operation
3. Press the EXIT button to exit.
Receiver
◄
On
►
➣ If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list.
Setup
➣ The receiver will work when you have properly connected the Optical IN jack
of the receiver to the Optical Out jack of the TV.
Move
Adjust
Return
➣ When the receiver (home theater) is set to On, you can hear sound output
from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV(air) signal, the
TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the Home theater receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a
DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver.
➣ When using the WISELINK Pro feature, sound may not output properly through the receiver.
➣ When listening through the receiver, there are restrictions for using the PIP and audio-related (MTS, Preferred
language) menus.
➣ If there is a power interruption to the TV when the “Receiver” is set to “On” (by disconnecting the power cord or a
power failure), the “Select Speaker” may be set to “External Speaker” when you turn the TV on again. (see page 43)
English - 134
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 134
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:40
Troubleshooting for Anynet+
Symptom
Solution
Anynet+ does not work.
• Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+
devices only.
• Connect only one receiver (home theater).
• Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected.
• Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3 cable connections.
• Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu.
• Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode.
• Check whether it is Anynet+ exclusive remote control.
• Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels, Operating
WISELINK Pro, Plug & Play, etc.)
• When connecting or removing the HDMI 1.3 cable, please make sure to search
devices again or turn your TV off and on again.
• Check if the Anynet+ Function of Anynet+ device is set on.
I want to start Anynet+.
• Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ Setup menu.
• Press the TV button on the TV remote control to switch to TV. Then press the
TOOLS button to show the Anynet+ menu and select a menu you want.
I want to exit Anynet+.
• Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu.
• Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other
than Anynet+ devices.
• Press CH, CH LIST, PRE-CH, and FAV.CH to change the TV mode.
(Note that the channel button operates only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+
device is not connected.)
The message Connecting to
Anynet+ device... appears on the
screen.
• You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or
switching to a view mode.
• Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is
complete.
The Anynet+ device does not play. You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play is in progress.
Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions.
Check whether or not the HDMI 1.3 cable is properly connected.
Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu.
Search Anynet+ devices again.
You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI 1.3 cable only. Some HDMI
cables may not support Anynet+ functions.
• If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable
or power cord or a power failure, please repeat the device scan.
The connected device is not
displayed.
•
•
•
•
•
The TV program cannot be
recorded.
Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected.
The TV sound is not output
through the receiver.
Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver.
English - 135
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 135
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:40
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If the TV seems to have a problem, first try this list of possible problems and solutions.
If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, call Samsung customer service at 1-800-SAMSUNG.
Problem
Possible Solution
Poor picture.
Try another channel.
Adjust the antenna.
Check all wire connections.
Poor sound quality.
Try another channel.
Adjust the antenna.
No picture or sound.
Try another channel.
Press the SOURCE button.
Make sure the TV is plugged in.
Check the antenna connections.
No sound or sound is too low at
maximum volume.
First, check the volume of units connected to your TV (digital broadcasting
receiver, DVD, cable broadcasting receiver, VCR, etc.). Then, adjust the TV
volume accordingly.
Picture rolls vertically.
Check all wire connections.
There is a problem with the picture
Run the Picture test in the Self diagnostic menu
There is a problem with the sound
Run the Sound test in the Self diagnostic menu
The TV operates erratically.
Unplug the TV for 30 seconds, then try operating it again.
The TV won’t turn on.
Make sure the wall outlet is working.
Remote control malfunctions.
Replace the remote control batteries.
Clean the upper edge of the remote control (transmission window).
Check the battery terminals.
‘Check signal cable’ message.
Ensure that the signal cable is firmly connected to the PC source.
‘Not Supported Mode’ message.
Check the maximum resolution and connected device’s Video frequency.
Compare these values with the data in the Display Modes.
Digital broadcasting screen problem.
Please check the digital signal strength and input antenna.
The image is too light or too dark.
Adjust the Brightness and Contrast.
Adjust the Fine tuning.
Black bars on the screen.
Make sure the broadcast you’re receiving is High Definition (HD).
HD channels sometimes broadcast Standard Definition (SD) programming,
which can cause black bars.
Set your cable/satellite box to stretch or widescreen mode to eliminate the bars.
Picture has a Red/Green or Pink tint.
Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks.
Closed Captioning not working.
If you are using a Cable/Satellite box, you must set Closed Captioning on the
box, not your TV.
Snowy picture.
Your cable box may need a firmware upgrade. Please contact your Cable
company.
Ghosting on picture.
This is sometimes caused by compatibility issues with your cable box.
Try connecting Component cables instead.
Horizontal bars appear to flicker, jitter
or shimmer on the image.
Adjust the Coarse tuning and then adjust the Fine tuning.
Vertical bars appear to flicker, jitter or
shimmer on the image.
Adjust the Coarse tuning and then adjust the Fine tuning.
English - 136
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 136
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:40
Problem
Possible Solution
Screen is black and power indicator
light blinks steadily.
On your computer check: Power, Signal Cable.
The TV is using its power management system.
Move the computer's mouse or press any key on the keyboard.
Image is not stable and may appear
to vibrate when you have a computer
connected to the PC input.
If the setting is not correct, use your computer utility program to change the
display settings.
➣ Your TV supports multiscan display functions within the following
frequency domain:
Horizontal frequency (kHz)
30~60
Vertical frequency (Hz)
60~75
PC Maximum refresh rate (at 60 Hz)
1920 x 1080
Image is not centered on the screen.
Adjust the horizontal and vertical position.
The screen position must be adjusted on the output source (i.e. STB) with a
digital signal.
The picture appears distorted in the
corner of the screen.
If “Just Scan” is selected with some external devices, the picture may appear
distorted in the corner of the screen. This symptom is caused by the external
devices, not TV.
The ‘Resets all settings to the default
values’ message appears.
This appears when you press and hold the EXIT button for a while. The product
settings are reset to the factory defaults.
You may see small particles if you
look closely at the edge of the bezel
surrounding the TV screen.
This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.
This TFT LCD panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels (6 220 800) which require sophisticated technology to produce.
However, there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of
the product.
English - 137
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 137
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:40
Installing the Stand
1. Attach your LCD TV to the stand.
➣ Two or more people should carry the TV.
➣ Make sure to distinguish between the front and back of the stand when attaching it.
➣ To make sure the TV is installed on the stand at a proper level, do not apply excess downward pressure to the
upper left of right sides of the TV.
2. Fasten two screws at position 1 and then fasten three screws at position 2.
➣ Stand the product up and fasten the screws. If you fasten the screws with the LCD TV placed down, it may lean to
one side.
Disconnecting the Stand
1. Remove five screws from the back of the TV.
2. Separate the stand from the TV.
➣ Two or more people should carry the TV.
3. Cover the bottom hole with the cover.
English - 138
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 138
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:41
Auto Wall-Mount Adjustment (Sold separately)
Once the auto wall mount is installed, your TV’s position can be easily adjusted.
V-Chip
Auto Wall-Mount
TV
Caption
Setup
TV Rear Panel
VCR
DVD
STB
External Settings
Entertainment
: Off
Energy Saving
: Off
PIP
Software Upgrade
EX-LINK Cable
(Not supplied)
Entering the menu
1.Press the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button on your remote control.
➣ The Wall Mount Adjustment screen is displayed.
➣ If the Wall Mount Adjustment screen is not displayed when clicking on
a direction button while watching your TV, use the menu to display that
screen.
• Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select
“Setup”, then press the ENTER
button.
• Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “External Settings”, then press the ENTER
button.
• Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Wall-Mount Adjustment”, then press the
ENTER
button.
External Settings
Melody
: Medium
Light Effect
: Watching TV
Wall-Mount Adjustment
Move
Enter
Return
Wall-Mount Adjusment
Remembering the Position
2.Adjust to the desired position using the ▲,▼,◄,► buttons.
➣ If you press an arrow button when no OSD is displayed on the TV screen,
the Adjustment screen appears.
➣ Press the INFO button to reset. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Yes”,
then press the ENTER
button. The position is initialized to the default
setting.
3.Press the Blue button.
Press the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a save mode from either Position 1,
Position 2 or Position 3 in order to save the current position.
➣ To not save the current position, press the RETURN button.
➣ When selecting a save mode, you cannot use the Color buttons.
4.Press the ENTER
button to save.
➣ When Position1 is selected, the message “Current position saved as
Position1” is displayed.
5.Press the ENTER
button.
➣ The saved Position appears on the left side of the OSD.
Moving to the remembered position
Position
Adjust 1 Save
2 3
Center
Save
Select a mode to Save.
Position1
Position2
Position3
Move SET
Enter
RESET
Return
Wall-Mount Adjusment
Position1
1.Complete Step 1 of “Entering the menu”.
Position
1 2.Pressing a Color (Red, Green, Yellow) button moves the auto wall mount to
Adjust Save
the saved position.
➣ You can move the wall mount to one of the 3 pre-set positions by pressing
the Red (Position 1), Green (Position 2) or Yellow (Position 3) buttons.
➣ If you adjust the position after moving to a pre-set position, the position display will disappear.
2 3
Center
➣ For installation, refer to the Installation Manual provided with the wall mount.
➣ For product installation and the installation and moving of the wall mount, make sure to consult a specialized
installation company.
➣ This installation manual is to be used when attaching the wall mount to a wall. When attaching to other building
materials, please contact your nearest dealer.
➣ The auto wall mount will not work when Anynet+ or WISELINK Pro is operating.
➣ LN46A850S1F and LN46A860S2F models are not compatible with the old electrically powered wall mount model
(WMN5090A).
English - 139
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 139
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:43
Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA)
Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. When attaching to other building materials, please contact
your nearest dealer. If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury.
Product Family
LCD-TV
PDP-TV
inches, model
VESA Spec. (A * B)
Standard Screw
23~ 26
200 * 100
M4
M6
32 ~ 40
200 * 200
LN46A850S1F,
LN46A860S2F,
LN52A850S1F,
LN52A860S2F
400 * 400
57
700 * 400 (No VESA)
57 ~ 70
800 * 400
80 ~
1400 * 800
42 ~ 50
600 * 400
55 ~ 70
800 * 400
63
No VESA
80 ~
1400 * 800
Quantity
4
M8
4
M8
6
4
➣ Standard dimensions for wall mount kits are shown in the table above.
➣ When purchasing our wall mount kit, a detailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly are provided.
➣ Do not use screws longer than the standard dimension, as they may cause damage
to the inside of the TV set.
➣ For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications,
the length of the screws may differ depending on their specifications.
➣ Do not use screws that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications.
Do not fasten the screws too strongly, this may damage the product or cause the
9mm
15~1
product to fall, leading to personal injury.Samsung is not liable for these kinds of
accidents.
➣ Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non-VESA
or non-specified wall mount is used or the consumer fails to follow the product
installation instructions.
➣ Our 57” and 63” models do not comply with VESA Specifications. Therefore, you
should use our dedicated wall mount kit for this model.
➣ Do not exceed 15 degrees tilt when mounting this TV.
Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to electric
shock.
English - 140
BN68-01691A-Eng_2.indd 140
2008-07-24 �� 12:33:40
Using the Anti-Theft Kensington Lock
The Kensington Lock is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place. The appearance and
locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the
Kensington Lock for proper use. The locking device has to be purchased separately.
Cable
Figure 2
Figure 1
<Optional>
➣ The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model.
1.Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the LCD TV (Figure 1) and turn it in the locking direction
(Figure 2).
2. Connect the Kensington Lock cable.
3. Fix the Kensington Lock to a desk or a heavy stationary object.
English - 141
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 141
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:45
경고
경고
주의
Securing the TV to the Wall
Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do not
hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death. Follow
주의
all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device for safety
purposes, as follows.
To secure the TV:
1.Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall.
Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall.
➣ You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on
the type of wall.
➣ Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied,
please purchase them separately.
Wall
2.Remove the screws from the center back of the TV, put the screws into
the clamps, and then fasten the screws onto the TV again.
➣ Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please
purchase the screws of the following specifications.
Screw Specifications
- For a 17 ~ 29 Inch LCD TV: M4 X 15
- For a 32 ~ 40 Inch LCD TV: M6 X 15
3.Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the
wall with a strong cable.
➣ Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards.
➣ It is safe to connect the cable so that the clamps fixed on the wall
are equal to or lower than the clamps fixed on the TV.
➣ Remove the cable before moving the TV.
Wall
4.Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check
connections for any sign of fatigue or failure. If you have any doubt
about the security of your connections,contact a professional installer.
English - 142
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 142
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:47
Specifications
Model Name
LN46A850S1F, LN46A860S2F
LN52A850S1F, LN52A860S2F
Screen Size
(Diagonal)
46 inches
(45.9 inches measured diagonally)
52 inches
(52.0 inches measured diagonally)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
10W X 2
10W X 2
44.1 X 1.9 X 27.3 inches
(1 119.0 X 48.4 X 692.5 mm)
44.1 X 11.1 X 29.3 inches
(1 119.0 X 283.0 X 745.1 mm)
49.7 X 1.9 X 30.7 inches
(1 263.1 X 48.4 X 779.3 mm)
49.7 X 12.4 X 32.7 inches
(1 263.1 X 314.0 X 831.7 mm)
55.0 lbs (25.0 kg)
46.1 lbs (20.9 kg)
68.8 lbs (31.2 kg)
59.1 lbs (26.8 kg)
PC Resolution
Sound
Output
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Body
With stand
Weight
With Stand
Without Stand
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
50°F to 104°F (10°C to 40°C)
10% to 80%, non-condensing
-4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C)
5% to 95%, non-condensing
Stand Swivel
(Left / Right)
-20° ~ 20°
➣ Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
➣ This device is a Class B digital apparatus.
➣ For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
English - 143
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 143
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:47
Dimensions
LN46A850S1F, LN46A860S2F
TOP VIEW
JACK PANEL DETAIL 3.7″(H) X 9.1″(W)
1.9
44.1
40.1
22.6
27.3
29.3
24.8
11.1
FRONT VIEW / SIDE VIEW
15.7 (400 mm)
15.7 (400 mm)
REAR VIEW
NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale.
Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice.
Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV.
Not responsible for typographical or printed errors.
© 2008 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
English - 144
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 144
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48
Dimensions
LN52A850S1F, LN52A860S2F
TOP VIEW
JACK PANEL DETAIL 3.7″(H) X 9.1″(W)
1.9
49.7
45.5
25.7
30.7
32.7
24.8
12.4
FRONT VIEW / SIDE VIEW
15.7 (400 mm)
15.7 (400 mm)
REAR VIEW
NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale.
Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice.
Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV.
Not responsible for typographical or printed errors.
© 2008 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
English - 145
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 145
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48
■ This product uses parts of the software from the Independent JPEG Group.
■ This product uses parts of the software owned by the Freetype Project (www.freetype.org).
■ This product uses some software programs which are distributed under the GPL/LGPL license. Accordingly, the
following GPL and LGPL software source codes that have been used in this product can be provided after asking to
[email protected].
GPL software: Linux Kernel, Busybox, Binutils
LGPL software: Glibc, Libusb, Libgphoto2, SDL
The GNU General Public License (GPL)
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General
Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all
its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose
authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure
that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source
code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and th at you know you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the
rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they
know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to
copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this
free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not
the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear
that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be
distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work
based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all
the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy
and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or
any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for
such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice
and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is
interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 146
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of
who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent
is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the
Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code,
to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange;
or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or
executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work,
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files,
plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source
code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third
parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights
under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission
to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or
works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions
of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License
would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which
is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if
he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 147
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to
time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any
later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write
to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving
the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this
is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where
the full notice is found.
One line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY;
for details type `show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type
`show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of
course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w’ and `show c’; they could even be mouseclicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for
the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at
compilers) written by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what
you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 148
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48
GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL)
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License,
version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the
software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries-of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think
carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular
case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you
receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs;
and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if
you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to
the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is
modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that
the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company
cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we
insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in
this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the
GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General
Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally
speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such
linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria
for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing
non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so
that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent
case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting
the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a
large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more
people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of
the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference
between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library,
whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 149
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright
holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also
called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application
programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work
based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing
the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The
act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium,
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of
warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of
this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in
exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and
copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these
conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any
change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program
that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith
effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and
performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function
must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms
of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the
Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General
Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public
License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these
notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machinereadable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used
for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to
copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties
are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 150
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being
compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the
Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library
(because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered
by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work
may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if
the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely
defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small
inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a
derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of
Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the
Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to
produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you
must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this
License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work
is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at
run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into
the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as
the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified
in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to
copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed
for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an
executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other
library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution
of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two
things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not
have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to
modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.
Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this
License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 151
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license
from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited
to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the
conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library
by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License
would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which
is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if
he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces,
the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such
case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time
to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any
later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may
choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible
with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two
goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 152
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it
free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or,
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to
most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for
the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by
James Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
BN68-01691A-00Eng.indb 153
2008-07-18 �� 10:25:48